MDR Technical

MDR9000S 1.
0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3 Product–release handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.6 Safety norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.6.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.7 Compliance with Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.8 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.8.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.8.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.8.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.8.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.8.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.8.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.8.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.8.8 Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.8.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.9.1 General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.9.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.9.3 General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.10 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.11 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.12 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.12.1 Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.12.2 General Use Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
02 011024 S401102401 G.MIRELLI F.FASS
01 010726 G.MIRELLI F.FASS
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MDR9000s 1.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 1 / 326
326
1.13 List of symbols and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.14 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.14.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.14.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1.14.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1.14.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.1 Introduction to the MDR 9000s Radio System Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.2 Network applications of the MDR-9000s equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.3 System general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.3.1 Indoor Unit (Regenerator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.3.2 Indoor Unit (Multiplex Assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.3.3 Outdoor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.4 General system block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.4.1 Block diagrams of UHR/UHRC configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.4.2 Block diagrams of WMSN configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.5 Radio Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1.6 Engineering Order Wire Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.6.1 Data Channel Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.7 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.7.2 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.7.3 Synchronization in WMSN station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.7.4 Compact ADM unit implementing synchronization function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.8 Equipment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.8.2 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1.8.3 The F and Qecc/QB3 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
1.8.4 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2 DESCRIPTION OF UHR/UHRC SUBSYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.2 Part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.3 UHR/UHRC Equipment and Unit physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.4 IDU Regenerator Baseband physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.4.1 IDU Regenerator 1+0 compact physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2.4.2 1+0 Extendible IDU Regenerator physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2.4.3 1+1/2+0 IDU Regenerator physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2.4.4 1+1/2+0 Frequency Reuse XPIC IDU Regenerator physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.4.5 SAM Unit front view and connectors pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.4.6 SAM Unit hardware presettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.4.7 RRA/MODEM Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.4.8 RRA/MODEM Unit hardware presettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.4.9 RRA EPS Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.4.10 Power Supply Units front view and connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.4.11 Fans Unit front view and connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2.4.12 Lamp Connection (1+0) front view and connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2.5 ODU - Transceiver physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

2.5.1 1+0 compact ODU Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.5.2 External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 2 / 326
326
2.5.3 1+1 ODU co–polar frequency diversity Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.5.4 1+1 ODU HST Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
2.5.5 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.5.6 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar with XPIC Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2.6 UHR/UHRC General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

2.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

2.6.2 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2.6.3 Loop–backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2.6.4 Frequency Agility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.6.5 Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.6.6 Transmitted power control: static adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.6.7 Bit Error Rate (BER) Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.6.8 System Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.6.9 System Service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
2.6.10 Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.6.11 User interface connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.6.12 LEDs indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.7 UHR/UHRC–IDU Units Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.7.2 Hardware composition and block–diagrams of the various configurations . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2.7.3 RRA/MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.7.4 XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2.7.5 Auxiliary service & management (SAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
2.7.6 STM–1 Electrical and OC-3 Optical Modules Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2.7.7 RRA EPS ( Electrical Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.7.8 Fans Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.7.9 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.8 UHR/UHRC–ODU Transceiver Units Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
2.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
2.8.2 Transceiver Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.8.3 RF Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
2.8.4 Portable Service Kit (PSK) (ODU maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3 DESCRIPTION OF UHM/UHMC SUBSYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4 STATION LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4.1 Introduction to System Configurations for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.2 Station layouts for UHR/UHRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.2.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.2.2 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.2.3 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.2.4 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4.2.5 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.2.6 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT/SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.2.7 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST UNPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.2.8 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.2.9 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.2.10 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.2.11 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.2.12 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4.2.13 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

4.2.14 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.2.15 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 3 / 326
326
4.2.16 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 XPOL FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.2.17 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 XPOL FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.2.18 MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.2.19 MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (2+0 XPOL FR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

4.3 Station layouts for WMSN One Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

4.3.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.3.2 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.3.3 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4.3.4 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.3.5 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.3.6 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.3.7 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.3.8 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.3.9 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.3.10 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.3.11 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.3.12 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.3.13 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.3.14 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.3.15 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.4 Station layouts for WMSN Two Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4.4.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4.4.2 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.4.3 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced Under study, not available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
4.4.4 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4.4.5 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.4.6 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.4.7 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.4.8 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.4.9 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.4.10 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.4.11 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.4.12 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.4.13 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.4.14 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.4.15 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4.4.16 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.4.17 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.5 Procedures for Station Layout change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.5.1 From ’REG. 1+1 FD UNPR’ to ’REG. 2+0 FD’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.5.2 From ’REG. 1+1 FD’ to ’REG. 2+0 FD’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

5.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.2 Characteristics of IF and RF connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.2.1 IDU–ODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.2.2 ODU to external antenna connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.3 Unit Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.3.1 Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.3.2 Regenerator and Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5.3.3 UHM/UHMC equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.4 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

5.4.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.4.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 4 / 326
326
5.4.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.4.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5.4.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.4.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5.4.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

5.5 Power Supply Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

5.5.1 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.5.2 ODU Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.5.3 UHR/UHRC Regenerator and modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
5.6 Alarm Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.6.1 IDU–RRA/MODEM Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.7 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.7.1 UHR/UHRC Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.7.2 UHM/UHMC Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.8 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.8.1 Compliance with European Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.8.2 Operating climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.8.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.8.4 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
6 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
6.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
6.2 Overall Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
6.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
6.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
6.3.2 Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
6.4 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.5 Maintenance aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
6.6 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
6.7 Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.7.2 Fans Unit replacement in case of alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.7.3 ODU Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
6.8 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
APPENDIX A : MDR-9715S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

A.1 15 GHz Frequency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
A.1.1 Frequency dependent parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
A.1.2 Technical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
APPENDIX B : MDR-9418S / 9518S / 9718S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
B.1 18 GHz Frequency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

B.1.1 Frequency dependent parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
B.1.2 Technical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 5 / 326
326
APPENDIX C : MDR-9423S / 9523S / 9723S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
C.1 23 GHz Frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
C.1.1 Layout – Frequency dependent parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
C.1.2 Technical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

APPENDIX D : MDR-9438S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
D.1 38 GHz Frequency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
D.1.1 Frequency dependent parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
D.1.2 Technical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
LIST OF ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 6 / 326
326
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
Fig. 1. Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Fig. 2. Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Fig. 3. Label 1/2 affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 4. Label 2/2 affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 5. Labels for units with stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 6. Labels for units without stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 7. Labels for units with heat–sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 8. Labels for units with optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 9. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 10. Subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 11. Modules’ labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 12. Label identifying label on catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 13. Label specifying serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 14. Label identifying label on catalogue (P/N) + CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 15. Serial number of item specified on catalogue + subrack ESD mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 16. UHR/UHRC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 17. WMSN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 18. Radio Ring OC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 19. Ring Closure and Radio Spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 20. OC3 Ring Rlosure Using Two UHR and One WMSN–TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 21. a) Wireless Regenerator; b) Wireless Line Terminal Using WMSN–OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 22. MDR-9000s Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 23. 1+0 UHRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 24. 2+0 UHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 25. 1+1 UHR (Frequency Diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 26. 1+1 UHR HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 27. 1+1 UHR With Cross–Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 28. WMSN–OS Using 1+0 UHRC and UHMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fig. 29. WMSN–OS Using 1+1 UHR Frequency Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 30. WMSN–OS Using 1+1 UHR HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 31. WMSN–TS Using Two 1+0 UHRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 32. G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 33. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 34. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 35. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 36. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 37. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 38. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 39. IDU 1+0 Compact (1+0 UHRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 40. ODU 1+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 41. IDU 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 42. ODU 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 43. IDU 1+1 HST (1+0 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 44. ODU 1+1 HST (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 45. IDU 1+1 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 46. ODU 1+1 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 47. IDU 1+1 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 48. ODU 1+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Fig. 49. IDU 1+1/2+0 cross polarization (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fig. 50. RRA/MODEM with XPIC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 7 / 326
326
Fig. 51. ODU 1+1/2+0 cross polarization (1+1 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 52. IDU 1+0 UHRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 53. IDU 1+0 UHR Extendible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 54. 1+1 / 2+0 UHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Fig. 55. IDU 1+1 /2+0 UHR FR XPIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Fig. 56. Auxiliary service (SAM) front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 57. SAM board’s LEDs position, colour and meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 58. SAM board’s I/O WEST 2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm unbalanced connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 59. RRA/MODEM unit front view (with XPIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 60. RRA EPS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 61. UHR/UHRC Power Supply Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 62. UHR/UHRC Fans Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 63. ODU 1+0 Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 64. External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 65. 1+1 Co–polar frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 66. 1+1 HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 67. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 68. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar with XPIC Transceiver physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 69. Protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 70. 1+1 HST with unprotected single user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 71. 1+1 HST with protected single user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 72. 1+1 FD with unprotected single user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 73. 1+1FD with protected single user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 74. Frequency agility restriction (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 75. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fig. 76. Typical ATPC threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 77. ATPC in HST configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 78. UHRC IDU Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 79. UHR IDU Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 80. ODU Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 81. UHRC 1+0 configuration Tx side (electrical/optical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 82. UHRC 1+0 configuration Rx side (electrical/optical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 83. UHR 1+1 configuration Tx side (electrical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 84. UHR 1+1 configuration Rx side (electrical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 85. UHR 2+0 configuration Tx side (electrical/optical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fig. 86. UHR 2+0 configuration Rx side (electrical/optical interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fig. 87. WMSN–TS configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 88. WMSN–TS configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 89. IDU/ODU Cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 90. XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 91. STM1 electrical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 92. OC-3 optical module – block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 93. View of STM–1 electrical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 94. View of OC-3 optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 95. RRA –EPS block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 96. Fans unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 97. Power supply unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fig. 98. ODU Radio block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fig. 99. Transceiver layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fig. 100. L.O. block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 101. Service Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fig. 102. 1+0 not ext. branching assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 103. 1+1/2+0 Co-polar frequency diversity branching assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 104. 1+1/2+0 Cross–polar Freq. Diversity / Freq. Reuse 1 cabinet branching assembly . . . . 186
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 8 / 326
326
Fig. 105. 1+1 HST, single antenna branching assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 106. Station 1+1 HST Space Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 107. Portable Service Kit (PSK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fig. 108. Portable Service Kit Hardware presettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fig. 109. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Compact: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 110. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Compact: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 111. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable CP or AP: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 112. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 113. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fig. 114. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 PROT: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 115. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST PROT: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 116. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST SD: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 117. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST SD: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Fig. 118. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 UNPR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 119. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST UNPR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 120. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD PROT CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 121. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD PROT AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fig. 122. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD UNPR CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fig. 123. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD UNPR AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fig. 124. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD CP/AP : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fig. 125. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fig. 126. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fig. 127. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fig. 128. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fig. 131. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 132. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 133. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 XPOL FR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 134. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 XPOL FR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fig. 135. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2 x (1+1/2+0 XPOL FR): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fig. 136. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2 x (2+0 XPOL FR): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fig. 137. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fig. 138. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fig. 139. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP/AP: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 140. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 141. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 142. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fig. 143. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fig. 144. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 145. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 146. MDR9000s WMSN OS ’1+1 FD CP/AP’ and ’1+1 XPOL FR’: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fig. 147. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fig. 148. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 149. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP/AP: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 150. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 151. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 152. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 153. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 154. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 155. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 156. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 157. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fig. 158. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 9 / 326
326
Fig. 159. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fig. 160. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR): station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 161. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 162. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Fig. 163. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Fig. 164. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 165. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 166. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP/AP: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fig. 167. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 168. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 169. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fig. 170. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 171. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fig. 172. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 173. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 174. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fig. 175. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP/AP 1D: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fig. 176. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 1D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 177. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 178. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP/AP 2D: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fig. 179. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 2D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fig. 180. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Fig. 181. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 182. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fig. 183. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Fig. 184. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fig. 185. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fig. 186. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Fig. 187. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fig. 188. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 189. Transmitted spectrum for STM–1, 128 QAM systems with narrow band filters . . . . . . . . . 258
Fig. 190. Transmitted spectrum for STM–1, 128 QAM systems with wide band filters . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 191. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fig. 192. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Fig. 193. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fig. 194. Special extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fig. 195. Special cables for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 196. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
TABLES
Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . . 17
Tab. 3. Special purpose handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 4. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tab. 5. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tab. 6. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tab. 7. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tab. 8. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tab. 9. List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 10. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 11. SONET MDR 9000s radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 12. Regenerator equipment configuration (n 1); 1+0 Compact (1+0 UHRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Tab. 13. Regenerator equipment configuration (n 2); 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tab. 14. Regenerator equip.config. (n 3–4); 1+1 HST (1+1 UHR); 1+1 HST with space diversity . 104
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 10 / 326
326
Tab. 15. Regenerator equip.config. (n 5); 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR) . 107
Tab. 16. Regenerator equip. config. (n 6); 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1UHR) . 110
Tab. 17. Regen. equip.config. (n 7); 1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization and XPIC option (1+1 UHR) 113
Tab. 18. SAM board’s Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40 pins connector 124
Tab. 19. SAM board’s Service channels on SCSI 26 pins connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Tab. 20. SAM Switch I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Tab. 21. SAM Switch I3 (fields for UHRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Tab. 22. SAM Switch I3 (fields for UHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tab. 23. UHR/UHRC Power Supply Unit connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tab. 24. UHR/UHRC Fans Unit’s Station Alarms connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tab. 25. Connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tab. 26. Auxiliary service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tab. 27. LED colour and meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tab. 28. RPS switching alarms criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tab. 29. RSOH switching alarms criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tab. 30. RFCOH switching alarms criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tab. 31. EPS switching alarms criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 32. UHR/UHRC Power supply specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tab. 33. Procedures for Station Layout change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tab. 34. ODU to external antenna connection – 128QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tab. 35. ODU to external antenna connection – 32QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tab. 36. ODU to external antenna connection – 16QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tab. 37. 15 GHz – 38 GHz R/T characteristics (modulation 128, 32, and 16 QAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tab. 38. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Tab. 39. Parameters specified for OC-3 Optical Interfaces (Refer. points are per ITU-T G.957) . 263
Tab. 40. Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Tab. 41. List of Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tab. 42. Regenerator Transceivers, Local Oscillators, and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Tab. 46. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Tab. 47. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 11 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
12 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
13 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
14 / 326
1 HANDBOOK GUIDE
1.1 General information

a) Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b) Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c) Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d) Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people, and to the equipment.
2) Access to the Equipment

Access to the equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.1.8 on pages
1.8 and on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should local regulations not be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
e) Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have adequate technical training on telecommunications and in particular
on the equipment to which this handbook refers.
Reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.1.3 on page 17 is usually
not enough to properly install, operate, and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 15 / 326
326
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT RELEASE ANV P/N
MDR-9715s 1.00.00 3DB 00936 AAAA
MDR-9718s 1.00.00 3DB 00937 AAAA
MDR-9518s 1.00.00 3DB 00938 AAAA
MDR-9418s 1.00.00 3DB 00939 AAAA
MDR-9723s 1.00.00 3DB 00940 AAAA
MDR-9523s 1.00.00 3DB 00078 AAAA
MDR-9423s 1.00.00 3DB 00079 AAAA
MDR-9438s 1.00.00 3DB 00075 AAAA
and to the following subsystems:
SUBSYSTEM
UHR/UHRC
UHM/UHMC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 16 / 326
326
1.3 Product–release handbook
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 16 consists of the following handbooks:
Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
MDR-9000s Technical Handbook 3EM 07818 AAAA

[1] Provides information regarding equipment description and composition, hardware setting
documentation, and maintenance (together with handbook REF.[4] )
MDR-9000s Installation Guide 3EM 07819 AAAA

[2] Provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel Installation
Engineering Dept. rules.
MDR-9000s Line–up Guide 3EM 07820 AAAA

[3] Provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel Installation
Engineering Dept. rules. It also comprises summary tables.
Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control
MDR-9000s
3DB 00555 AAAA
CT Operator’s Handbook
[4]
Provides MDR-9000s screens and operational procedures for equipment SW management
and maintenance.
Tab. 3. Special purpose handbooks
9600USY/MDR9000S SNMP MIBS 3EM 07821 AAAA
[5]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regaarding the Simple Network
Management Protocol software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 17 / 326
326
Tab. 4. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
N.B. 1320CT and Q3CT–P are equivalent terms

1320CT
3AL 79186 AAAA
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[6]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.5.0
3AL 71079 AAAA
Operator’s Handbook
[7]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 71081 AAAA
[8]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
SEC Rel.5.1 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 71104 AAAA
[9]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the SECurity
management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
Tab. 5. Documentation on CD–ROM
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No.
DCP 9600USY/MDR9000s 1.0 CD_ROM DOC 3DB 00869 AAAA
[10] Beginning with Ed.02 of this CD ROM, contains, in electronic format, all handbooks: REF.[1]
tthrough [9]. Ed.01 does not include handbooks REF [7] through [9].
DCP 1320CT BASIC CD–ROM EN 3AL 79549 AAAA
[11]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[7] to [9]. This CD ROM is no
longer necessary when CD ROM [10] Ed.02 is published.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 18 / 326
326
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for Instruction
Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: Contains general information on handbook structure and history,

safety norms, EMC and type of labels that might be affixed to the
equipment. Also lists the handbooks the Operators should have
in order to carry out the required operations.
DESCRIPTIONS: Contains all the equipment’s general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical). This section is frequency independent and applies to all
the product family
MAINTENANCE: Contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures, and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)C
APPENDICES: Each appendix of this section contains the configuration items

of one of the product releases listed on page 16. This section is
the frequency dependent part of the manual.
ANNEXES & HARDWARE Encloses special documents and the documents related to unit
SETTING DOCUMENTATION: hardware setting options, if envisaged.
(*) As equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PC–based Craft
Terminal), the maintenance carried out with such system is described in the Operator’s Handbook
in the Maintenance chapter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 19 / 326
326
1.5 Handbook configuration check
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
n = new part
m = modified part
Tab. 6. Handbook configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03
HANDBOOK GUIDE n m
DESCRIPTIONS n m
1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION n m
1.1 Introduction to the MDR 9000s Radio System Family n m
1.2 Network applications of the MDR9000s equipment n
1.3 System general description n
1.4 General system block diagrams n
1.5 Radio Configurations n
1.6 Signal Transmission n
1.7 Synchronization n
1.8 Equipment Control n m
2 DESCRIPTION OF UHR/UHRC SUBSYSTEM n m
2.1 Introduction n
2.2 UHR/UHRC Part lists n
2.3 UHR/UHRC Equipment and Unit physical views: introduction n
2.4 IDU Regenerator Baseband physical views n m
2.5 ODU - Transceiver physical views n m
2.6 UHR/UHRC General Description n m
2.7 UHR/UHRC–IDU Units Description n
2.8 UHR/UHRC–ODU Transceiver Units Description n
3 DESCRIPTION OF UHM/UHMC SUBSYSTEM n
3.1 Introduction n
4 STATION LAYOUTS n m
4.1 Introduction to System Configurations for network solutions n m
4.2 Station layouts for UHR/UHRC n m
4.3 Station layouts for WMSN One Side n m
4.4 Station layouts for WMSN Two Sides n m
4.5 Procedures for station layout change n
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS m
5.1 General Characteristics n m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 20 / 326
326
EDITION 01 02 03
5.2 Characteristics of IF and RF connections n m

5.3 Unit Characteristics n m
5.4 Optical Safety n

5.5 Power Supply Characteristics n m
5.6 Alarm Characteristics n
5.7 Mechanical Characteristics n
5.8 Environmental conditions n
MAINTENANCE n m
ÉÉÉ
6 MAINTENANCE n m
ÉÉÉ
APPENDICES n m
A MDR-9715 n m
B MDR-9418 / 9518 / 9718 n m
C MDR-9423 / 9523 / 9723 n m
D MDR-9438 n m
ANNEXES & HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION n m
ANNEXES n m
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION n
LIST OF ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS n m
Note: The edition of the enclosed documents (section ANNEXES & HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION) is not subjected to configuration check.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 21 / 326
326
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created July 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.

1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02

Ed.02 created October 2001.
The following main changes have been made:
– in section “Handbook Guide” : product–release handbook list updated
– in section “Description”:
• chapter “UHR/UHRC General Description” improved (protections)
• paragraphs “UHR/UHRC physical views” updated for new front plates, which include
explanatory symbols and writings
• hardware presettings of unit SAM reintroduced with explanatory notes
• chapter “Station layouts” fully revised; in particular procedures for station layout change have
been added
– section “Technical Specifications” updated
– section “Maintenance” improved (Maintenance Tool Kit, Spare Parts, ODU repair)
– in section “Appendices”: technical characteristics eliminated (moved in section “Technical
Specifications”)
– section “Annexes & Hardware Setting Documentation” updated.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
ED.01.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
to other places in the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 22 / 326
326
1.6 Safety norms
1.6.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove clothing from the burned parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 23 / 326
326
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying
on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.

1

Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his

mouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patient’s head and one under
2
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
3 other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and

4 mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
5 his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patient’s chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patient’s nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patient’s head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
6 Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1.7 Compliance with Norms
Refer to para.5.8.1 on page 270.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 24 / 326
326
1.8 Safety Rules
1.8.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation, and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
– Installation
– Line-up
– Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed access ito the equipment parts which are
protected with Cover Plate Shields removable only with tools
– In case of absolute need to access inside the equipment when it is operating, allowance
is exclusively to service personnel. Service personnel or technical assistance is described
as follows:
personnel who have adequate technical knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that exists in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for all personnel.
Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
Service Personnel are not allowed to repair: hence access to parts not specified is not
permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors/hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which dangerous voltages are present must be kept
exclusively by the service personnel.
– For eventual cleaning of external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
flammable substance or any substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions, etc.
– It is recommended that a slightly damp cleaning cloth be used.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as to cut off power stations
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 25 / 326
326
1.8.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are

enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
• heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
• microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 26 / 326
326
The symbols presented in para.1.8.3 through 1.8.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
1.8.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
1.8.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If Class 1 equipment is connected to mains, then the label associated with it will state that the equipment
must to be grounded before connecting to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to mains
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
1.8.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or d.c. power is
present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up / maintenance documents and the following
general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if present in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
c) This equipment is intended for installation in a RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 27 / 326
326
1.8.4 Harmful Optical Signals
1.8.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 60825–1–1993

International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wave length
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
LASER RADIATION
CAUTION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
exemple of power and lenght values

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 28 / 326
326
1.8.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipment, units, or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that
the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eye damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eye damage. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation, turn–up, and maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical
signals, described in the relevant installation, turn–up, and maintenance documents and the following
general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable, or connector at other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eye shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
1.8.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para.5.4 on page 262.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 29 / 326
326
1.8.5 Risks of Explosions
1.8.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and the risk is identified with the following label:

Slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed indicating that the openings
must not be covered up.
1.8.6 Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 30 / 326
326
1.8.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in °C ):
(T–Tamb) (DTmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:
T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.
DTmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment
specification or 25°C, whichever is greater.
Tab. 7. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2
Maximum overtemperature
Operator–accessible parts
Glass, Plastic,
Metal
porcelain rubber
35°C/95°F 45°C/113°F 60°C/140°F

Handle knob, ect., held or touched
for short periods
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held 30°C/86°F 40°C/104°F 50°C/122°F
45°C/113°F 55°C/131°F 70°C/158°F

Outer surface of the equipment that
can be touched
45°C/113°F 55°C/131°F 70°C/158°F

Inner surface of the equipment that
can be touched
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation, turn–up, and maintenance of equipment parts where heat–radiating
mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation, turn–up, and maintenance documents
and the following general rule:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 31 / 326
326
1.8.8 Microwave radiations
Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure that transmitters are switched OFF before
working close to or in front of the antennas.

No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, the body
should not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).
1.8.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:
– chapter 6, para.6.1 on page 281

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 32 / 326
326
1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronical
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation, and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:
– Installation,
– Line–up,
– Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility are identified in this handbook by the
following symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
1.9.1 General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decreased them.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 33 / 326
326
1.9.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,

ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given.
1.9.3 General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 34 / 326
326
1.10 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)
Before removing ESD protection from monitors, connectors, etc., observe the precautionary measures
stated. Make sure that ESD protection has been replaced after having completed maintenance and
monitoring operations.
Since most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges the following warning labels have
been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
• an elasticized band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
1.11 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)

statement....
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 35 / 326
326
1.12 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment.

The label description is grouped as follows:
– Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment, starting on this page
– General Use Labels, starting on page 40.
1.12.1 Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment
In the following, the position and the contents of the labels specific for 9600USY Equipment are described:
– on 9600USY IDU assembly, herebelow

– on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 configuration, on page 37
– on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration:
• Label 1/2, on page 38, present both in older and newer supplies
• Label 2/2, on page 39, present only in newer supplies
N.B. Newer supplies with Label 2/2 are planned for mid 2001.
1.12.1.1 Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly
ALCATEL 9618 USY 128 ! 12345
STATION 01234567 CE
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
9618 USY 128 (example) Equipment Acronym

! Not Harmonized Frequency Logo
12345 (example) Competent Body Number
STATION 01234567 (example) System Documentation Reference
CE European Community Logo
Fig. 1. Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 36 / 326
326
1.12.1.2 Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 configuration
ALCATEL
9618 USY 128 CE 12345
!
IN ALTERNATIVE TR0 18470 : 18662
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII A
(in newer supplies) CH 18470
299302337 01 3DB00249AAAA 01
CW001921014
STATION 01234567 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII B
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL

ElectroStatic Device Logo
TR0 18470:18662 (example) Transceiver “0” Frequency Range

N.B.
CH 18470 (example) Transceiver “0” Frequency Channel
299302337 01 (example) Factory P/N + CS
3DB00249AAAA 01 (example) ANV P/N + CS
A ANV P/N + CS Bar Code 128
CW001921014 (example) Factory S/N
B Factory S/N Bar Code 128
N.B. In newer supplies: “Frequency Range” (if wide–band filter used) and “Frequency Channel” (if
narrow–band filter used) in alternative
Fig. 2. Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 37 / 326
326
1.12.1.3 Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
OLDER SUPPLIES NEWER SUPPLIES

ALCATEL 9618 USY 128 CE 12345
!
TR0 18470 : 18662
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII A
CH 18470
299302337 01 3DB00249AAAA 01
IN ALTERNATIVE TR1 18470 : 18662
(in newer supplies) CW001921014
CH 18470
STATION 01234567 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII B

Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL

ElectroStatic Device Logo
N.B.
N.B.
299302337 01 (example) Factory P/N + CS
3DB00249AAAA 01 (example) ANV P/N + CS
A ANV P/N + CS Bar Code 128
CW001921014 (example) Factory S/N
B Factory S/N Bar Code 128
N.B. In newer supplies: “Frequency Range” (if wide–band filter used) and “Frequency Channel” (if
narrow–band filter used) in alternative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 3. Label 1/2 affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 38 / 326
326
NEWER SUPPLIES
NOT PRESENT ON
OLDER SUPPLIES
ALCATEL
1VH XPIC VH0

Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
Connector position channel “1”

1 Tranceiver identifier “1”
Connector position channel “0”
0 Tranceiver identifier “0”
V Polarization type Vertical
N.B.
H Polarization type Horizontal
XPIC Frequency Reuse with XPIC option equipped N.B.
N.B. The following marks are written on the label during the final test in factory:
– for each channel “0” and “1”, the option “V” or “H” , in alternative
– “XPIC” option (marked if XPIC equipped)
Fig. 4. Label 2/2 affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 39 / 326
326
1.12.2 General Use Labels
Fig. 5. thru’ Fig. 11. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.

Fig. 12. thru’ Fig. 15. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 8. Label references
Ref. No. FIG. and Page Name of Label

1 Fig. 12. page 48 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)
2 Fig. 13. page 48 Serial number of item specified on catalogue
3 Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)
4 Final Test certificate
5 Unit ESD mark
6 CE mark
7 ESD mark for packaged subunits
8 Subrack ESD mark
9 Factory use only code
10 Fig. 14. page 49 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark
11 Fig. 15. page 49 Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 40 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Fig. 5. Labels for units with stiffening bar
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
41 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Fig. 6. Labels for units without stiffening bar
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
42 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
NB. = Affix labels to p.c.’s components side on the empty spaces.
Fig. 7. Labels for units with heat–sink.
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
43 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Fig. 8. Labels for units with optical interfaces
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
44 / 326
NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.’s components side on the empty spaces.
NOTE : The components shown on the front–cover are merely indicative showing that there is no space
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
left for the labels
Fig. 9. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 45 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Fig. 10. Subrack labels
10
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
11
46 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Fig. 11. Modules’ labels
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
47 / 326
FACTORY P/N + CS

ANV + ICS P/N
Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
Fig. 12. Label identifying label on catalogue
Serial No.
Bar code of the serial No.

Fig. 13. Label specifying serial No.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 48 / 326
326
No COMPETENT BODY
EQUIPMENT
ALCATEL
CE MARK
STATION REF.
Fig. 14. Label identifying label on catalogue (P/N) + CE mark
ANV FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

FACTORY P/N + CS (format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS
Subrack ESD mark
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER

ANV FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE
Fig. 15. Serial number of item specified on catalogue + subrack ESD mark
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 49 / 326
326
1.13 List of symbols and abbreviations
Tab. 9. List of symbols

N.B. This table lists some symbols whose interpretation could be doubtful.

SYMBOL MEANING AND COMMENTS
In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means ’from .. to ..’.
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
H V
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal or vertical
SYMBOLS H
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. )
V
Tab. 10. List of abbreviations
ABBREVIATION MEANING
STARTING WITH NUMBERS
1D 1 STM1 drop insert
2D 2 STM1 drop insert
A
ABIL Enabling
ABN Abnormal
AC Alternate Current
ACSE Association Control Service Element
ADC – A/D Analog to Digital Converter
AE Access Enable
AF Atomic Funtion
ADM Add and Drop Multiplexer
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
AND Alarm on both station batteries

ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOW Additional Order Wire
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 50 / 326
326
AP Alternate polar
APD Avalanche Photodiode

API Access Point Identifier

APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASE Application Service Element
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT Attended Alarm
ATL Far Terminal Alarm
ATM Asynchronous transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
ATTD ATTendeD (alarm storing)
AU–n Administrative Unit – n (Order)
AUG Administrative Unit Group
AUOH AU Pointer
AUX AUXiliary
B
BATT Battery
BB Base Band
BBE Background Block Error
BCA Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER Bit Error Rate
BIP–x Bit Interleaved Parity – x
BNC Bayonet Not Coupling
C
CAND All power supply units are faulty
CCDP Co–Channel Dual Polarized (Frequency re–use)
CCITT International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
CE European Conformity
CFRD Component Failure Rate Data
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CK Clock
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CMISS Card Missing
CO Central Office
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
COAX Coaxial
CP Co–polar
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 51 / 326
326
CPE Customer premises equipment

CPI Incoming parallel contacts

CPO Outgoing parallel contacts
CPU Central Processor Unit
CRC–n Cyclic Redundancy Check – n
CRU Clock Reference Unit
CS (Item) Change Status
CSW Common SoftWare
CT Craft Terminal
CTP Connection Termination Point
C12/C3/C4 1st, 3rd and 4th level container
D
DA Distant Alarm
D/A Digital to Analog (converter/conversion)
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel (D1–D12)
DCCM Multiplex Section DCC (D4–D12)
DCCR Regenerator Section DCC (D1–D3)
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DEFEC FEC Decoder
DEM Demodulator
DF Dialog Failure
DIV Diversity
DM Degraded Minute
DPLL Digital Phase Locked Loop
DRRS Digital Radio Relay System
DS Degraded Second
DSI Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTI Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E
EB Errored Block
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
EBC Errored Block Count

EBU European Broadcasting Union
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 52 / 326
326
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Communication Channel

ECS External Communication Service

ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EE Equipment Engineering
EF Equipment Failure
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF Equipment Management Function
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Errored Second
ESD Electrostatic discharges
ETR European Telecommunication Report
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW Early Warning
EWH Early Warning High
EWL Early Warning Low
EXC–BER Excessive BER
E2PROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
F
F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse
FE Front End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction (Code)
FEPROM Flesh Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
FERF Far End Receive Failure
FIT Failure Unit
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FR ’Failure Rate’ or ’Frequency Reuse’
FSRC Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD Failed Switch Request Duration
G
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
GA Gate Array
GB Ground Benign
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 53 / 326
326
GF Ground Fixed

GM Ground Mobile

GND Ground
H
H Horizontal (polarization)
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDBK Handbook
HDB3 High Density Binary 3
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HET HETerofrequency or Frequency Diversity
HEW High Early Warning
HK HouseKeeping
HOA High Order Adaptation
HOI High Order Interface
HPT High order Path Termination
HPC High order Path Connection
HPOM High order Path Overhead Monitoring
HS High Speed
HST Hot Standby
HSUT High order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
HW Hardware
HWP Hardware Protection
I
ICS Item Change Status
ID IDentifier
IDU InDoor Unit
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
IF Intermediate Frequency
IN Input
IND Indicative alarm
INT Internal Local Alarms
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IRC International Radiotechnical Commission
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ISO International Standards Organization

ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 54 / 326
326
ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITU–R (*) International Telecommunication Union – Radiocommunication

ITU–T (*) International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication

J
JE1 Joint Engineering
L
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link access Procedure on D channel
LC Loss of Configuration
LED Light Emission Diode
LEW Low Early Warning
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO Local Oscillator
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOI Low Order Interface
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOP Loss Of Pointers
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
LPM Loop–back line side (remote)
LPOM Lower Order Path Monitoring
LPT Lower order Path Termination
LS Low Speed
LSUT Lower order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
M
MC Monitoring Channel
MCF Message Communication Function
MDT Mean Dawn Time
MEM Memorization
MIR Loss of incoming pulses
MLC Multi–Level Code
MLM Multi Longitudinal mode
MMIC Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MOD Modulator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 55 / 326
326
MS–AIS Multiplex Section – Alarm Indication Signal

MSOH Multiplex Section OverHead

MS–RDI Multiplex Section – Remote Defect Indication
MS–REI Multiplex Section – Remote Error Indication
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
N
NBF Narrow Band Filter
NDS Near–end Defect Second
NA Not Applicable
NE Network Element
NEBC Near–end Errored Block Count
NEFA Network Element Function Application
NF Noise Figure
NFD Net Filter Discrimination
NG Not Urgent
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NURG Not urgent alarm
O
OCT Office Craft Terminal
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
ODU OutDoor Unit
OFA Optical Fiber Amplifier
OFS Out of Frame Second
OH OverHead
OH–BUS Dedicated housekeeping stream
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OIRT Russian Regulatory Body
OMSN Optinex Multi Service Node
OOF Out Of Frame
OOS Out Of Service
OR Logic sum/Loss of only one station battery
ORALIM OR’ing of station power supply alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
OS ’Operation System’ or ’One Side terminal’

OUT Output
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 56 / 326
326
OVF Overflow
OW Order Wire
P
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PFAIL Power supply failure
PI Physical Interface
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
PMMF Physical Machine Management Function
POH Path OverHead
PPI Plesiochronous Physical interface
ppm parts per million
PPS Path Protection Switching
PRx Received power
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Signal
P/S Parallel/Serial converter
PSA Protection Switch Actual
PSA C Protection Switch Count
PSA D Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSK Portable Service Kit
PSR Protection Switch Request
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTx Transmitted power
Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
TMN Interface with B2 protocol. Interface towards plesiochronous
Q2/QB2
equipment
Q3/QB3 TMN Interface with B3 protocol. Interface towards TMN
R
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RAM Random Access Memory
RAPS Radio Automatic Protection Switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RC Radio Controller
RCK Received clock
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 57 / 326
326
RCIM Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RECC Recommendation
RECT Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
REI Remote Error Indication
REF Reference
REL Release
RES Radio Equipment and Systems
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL Received Level
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
RMS Root Mean Square
RNURG Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RURG Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
ROSE Remote Operation Service Element
RPI Radio Physical Interface
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRA Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT Radio Relay Terminal
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section OverHead
RSPI Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RT Transceiver
RTF Remote Terminal Failure
Rx Receiver/Received
S
SA Service Alarm
SBL Security Block
SC Shelf/System Controller
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SERS Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SES Severly Errored Second

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 58 / 326
326
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation function
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

SF Signal Fail
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SM Single Mode/Synchronous Mux
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCP/I (** ) Subnetwork Connection Protection Inherent
SOH Section OverHead
SOHF SOH Failure
SQ Squelch
S/P Serial to Parallel
SPI SDH Physical Interface
SPS Synchronous Path Sink
SR Synchronous Radio
SRMR Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSF Server Signal Fail
SSM Synchronisation Status Message
STBY Standby
STM–N Synchronous Transport Module – N (Hierarchic level)
STM–0 51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU Supervisory Unit
SW ’Switch’ or ’Software’
SWP Software Package
T
TA TeleAlarms
TANC Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units
TAT Turn Around Time
TC ’Tandem Connection’ or ’Terminal Connector’
TD Layout drawing
TEM Transversal Electric Mode
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL Transmitted Level
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TLTS Transmitted Level Threshold Second

TM Transmission and Multiplexing
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 59 / 326
326
TMN Telecommunication Management Network

TOR Remote alarm indicating loss of one of the station batteries

TORC Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit
TPH Telephone
TTP Trail Termination Point
TP Termination Point
TR TRansceiver
TRIB Tributary
TRU Top Rack Unit
TS ’Time Slot’ or ’Two Side terminal station’
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TSF Trail Signal Fail
TTF Transport Terminal Function
TU–n Tributary Unit – n (Order)
TUG–n Tributary Unit Group – n (Order)
TUOH Tributary Unit Overhead
TUP/UP Equipment Controller remote alarm
Tx Transmitter/Transmitted
U
U Unavailability
UDR Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG Urgent Alarm
UHM Urban Hight capacity Multiplexer
UHR Urban Hight capacity Regenerator
URG Urgent
USK Stackable Unit
USY Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System
UT Unavailability Time
V
V Vertical (polarization)
VC–n Virtual Container –n
VCO Voltage Controller Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VHM Virtual Hardware Machine
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
W
WAN Wide Access Network
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 60 / 326
326
WBF Wide Band Filter
VMMF Virtual Machine Management Function

WMSN Wireless Multi Service Node

WMSN –OS Wireless Multi Service Node One Side
WMSN –TS Wireless Multi Service Node Two Sides
WLT Wireless Line Terminal
WS Work Station
WST Way Side Traffic
X
XPD Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC Cross Polar Interference Canceller
XPI Cross Polar Interference
XPIF Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL Cross Polar/Polarization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 61 / 326
326
1.14 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
1.14.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.
So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.1.14.4 on page 63.
1.14.2 Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
1.14.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.

Plant-dependent documentation, if considered by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel–Telecom Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the
”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 62 / 326
326
1.14.4 Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated with the ”product–release” are listed in para. 1.3, Tab. 1. , on page 17 .
Each handbook is identified by:

– the name of the ”product-family”. Each appendix of the Technical Handbook is identified by the
product release (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the new versions, but not to the
previous ones),
– the handbook name,
– the handbook P/N,
– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
1.14.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Tab. 6. on page 20;
• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause an edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s
”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
1.14.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
Updated handbook delivery means the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue.
1.14.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 63 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
64 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
DESCRIPTIONS
65 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
66 / 326
1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction to the MDR 9000s Radio System Family

The Alcatel MDR 9000s (High Frequency SONET OC3 Radio System) is a new generation of SONET
microwave radio equipment that satisfies the demand of wide–band services, exploiting wireless SONET
technology to provide flexible, reliable and cost–effective solution, fast and easy to implement.
Typical applications include:
– New SONET (OC3) radio infrastructure;

– Closure of OC3 fiber optic rings;
– Wide–band wireless access, wireless local loop and last mile application;
– Wide–band wireless fiber optic extension, suitable for installation with Alcatel Optinex equipment;
– Back–up to fiber optical trunk links;
– Radio spurs of fiber/radio STM–n backbones or rings;
– Regional links in synchronous networks.
The MDR 9000s radio systems have been developed in accordance with the Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET) standards requirements.
The MDR 9000s Radio family has the capability to exploy the maximum channel density foreseen by the
standard, thanks to the possibility to operate in co–polar or in cross–polar mode. When operating in
co–polar mode the Radio System is equipped with narrow band RF filters, while operating in cross–polar
mode, it is equipped with wide band RF filters. In the last case the use of wide band RF filters allows the
additional functionalities of frequency agility and frequency reuse.
The MDR 9000s system architecture is based on a split mount architecture. The system consists of an
INDOOR unit (IDU) and an OUTDOOR unit (ODU).
The IDU basic configuration includes a regenerator base–band processing circuitry with OC3 optical
interface and modulator–demodulator functions. An optional dedicated add-drop multiplexer (ADM) can
be added to this configuration in order to have a WMSN–OS (Wireless Multi Service Node–One Side) or
WMST–TS (Wireless Multi Service Node–Two Side). The latter MUX unit can be equipped to allow OC3 or
3x45/28x1.5 Mbit/s interfacing.
ODU houses the outdoor transceiver in a very lightweight cabinet and interfaces with 300 mm / 12 in. or 600
mm /i24 in. integrated antenna. A cable up to 350 m / 1148.3 ft long connects the indoor and outdoor units.
One 2Mbit/s WST (Way Side Traffic), transmitted as Radio Frame Complementary Over Head (RFCOH),
can be provided in addition to the OC3 main traffic.
An EOW (Engineer Order Wire), 3 x 64 kbit/s channels and 1 x 9.6 kbit/s (RS232) are available as service
channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 67 / 326
326
Interfaces F and QB3/SNMP, that can be connected to a Craft Terminal (CT) and to an external supervision
Operating System (OS) respectively, are available on the indoor unit front panel.
Therefore, the following operations can be carried out on the system:

– Monitoring of status and alarms;
– Measurement of system parameters;
– Maintenance operations;
– Troubleshooting.
LED indicators are located on the IDU to display the presence of a Major/Minor/Warning general alarm
(with storing capability), or manual operations in progress and EOW calls.
A service assembly equipped with a mini distribution frame, and a Top Rack Unit assembly, complete with
the following devices can be equipped as an option: relay dry–contact loops (driven by remote alarms and
remote controls), a loudspeaker, a wire–wrap distributor, and a power distributor.
Due to its compact and low power consumption characteristics, the IDU can be desk, wall, or rack
mounted.
The MDR 9000s Urban link system is based on the following two configurations:
a) Urban High Capacity Regenerator (UHR)

This radio system operates with an OC3 Optical input signal. The SONET signal base–band
processing operates as standard regenerator type, see Fig. 16. on page 68. This system exists in
a standard version (UHR) and a compact one (UHRC).
IDU ODU
OC 3
RRA/MOD TR
UHR/UHRC
Fig. 16. UHR/UHRC system
b) Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN)

This radio system consists of a “Regenerator” and operates together with a particular MUX family,
named UHM/UHMC. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node), see Fig. 17. on
page 68. It can be equipped with UHR or UHRC regenerator.
OC 3 ODU
IDU
3x45;28x1.5
UHM/UHMC RRA/MOD TR
Fig. 17. WMSN system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 68 / 326
326
In this manual, the compact version of the system will also be called Not Extendible (NE), taking into
account the fact that the standard version could be sub–equipped as 1+0
The SONET MDR 9000s radio family systems are listed in the following table:
Tab. 11. SONET MDR 9000s radio family
URBAN SONET MDR 9000s
SYSTEM FREQUENCY RF BANDWIDTH CHANNEL SONET TRANSPORT and

(GHz) (MHz) SPACING MODULATION
(MHz)
MDR-9715s 14.5-15.35 30 475 (Canada) OC 3 / 128 QAM

640 (US Gov)
MDR-9418s 17.7-19.7 50 1560 OC 3 / 16 QAM
MDR-9518s 17.7-19.7 40 1560 OC 3 / 32 QAM
MDR-9718s 17.7-19.7 30 1560 OC 3 / 128 QAM
MDR-9423s 21.2-23.6 50 1200 OC 3 / 16 QAM
MDR-9523s 21.2-23.6 40 1200 OC 3 / 32 QAM
MDR-9723s 21.2-23.6 30 1200 OC 3 / 128 QAM
MDR-9438s 38.6-40.0 50 700 OC 3 / 16 QAM
MDR-9538s 38.6-40.0 40 700 OC 3 / 32 QAM
MDR-9738s 38.6-40.0 30 700 OC 3 / 128 QAM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 69 / 326
326
1.2 Network applications of the MDR-9000s equipment
In the following figures some typical network applications are depicted.

RADIO
RADIO REG.
REG.
MUX MUX
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
MUX
Fig. 18. Radio Ring OC3
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
MUX MUX
Radio spurs 1+0/1+1

MUX
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 19. Ring Closure and Radio Spurs
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 70 / 326
326
RADIO
REG.
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
MUX
MUX MUX
WMSN TS
MUX
Fig. 20. OC3 Ring Rlosure Using Two UHR and One WMSN–TS
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
MUX MUX
a) Wireless Regenerator
WMSN OS WMSN OS
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
MUX MUX
b) Wireless Line Terminal
Fig. 21. a) Wireless Regenerator; b) Wireless Line Terminal Using WMSN–OS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 71 / 326
326
1.3 System general description
The MDR-9000s Radio Subsystem, named UHR/UHRC (see Fig. 22. below) is designed to transmit an
RF signal 128/32/16–QAM–modulated with an OC3 signal.

The transceiver operates in the assigned RF band in accordance with ITU–R related specifications.
The outstanding features of the UMDR-9000s Radio Family are:
– high frequency stability of the carrier, due to use of a synthesized oscillator;
– low threshold figure, due to use of a low noise RF preamplifier;
– high circuit linearity, as required by the type of modulation adopted (128/32/16 QAM).
The MDR-9000s Radio System comprises the following main subsystems:

– the UHR/UHRC subsystem, including:
• IDU Regenerator
• ODU Transceiver
– an optionally equipped IDU Multiplexer, called UHM/UHMC.
An MDR-9000s Radio System comprising UHR/UHRC and UHM/UHMC is named WMSN (Wireless Multi
Service Node)
WMSN
ODU
TRANSCEIVER
MUX IDU
RRA MODEM
UHM/UHMC UHR/UHRC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 22. MDR-9000s Radio System
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 72 / 326
326
1.3.1 Indoor Unit (Regenerator)
In the Regenerator configuration the IDU is a single assembly (1unit high in the 1+0 Compact version or
2 units high in the 1+1/2+0 version). The units housed in the assembly are designed to perform the
following main function:

RRA/MODEM: this unit is the interface between the user side and the radio side. It can accept electrical
STM–1 or optical OC–3 signals (equipped with different front modules), performs RSOH termination,
MSOH transparency, and RFCOH insertion/extraction (2 Mbit/s WST and auxiliary channels). Besides the
standard radio regeneration adaptation function, the unit also houses the modulator and demodulator
circuits. The modulation adopted for the MDR-9000s systems is 128 QAM that allows the best exploitation
of the bands even at very high frequencies; optionally the 16 QAM or 32 QAM modulation is available
in case of higher system gain needs. The 128 QAM modulation, the 32 QAM modulation, or the 16 QAM
modulation require the use of different units.
Use of an additional baby board in the RRA/MODEM units, allows the frequency reuse technique to be
applied to the MDR-9000s systems increasing transmission capacity without additional band occupation.
Auxiliary & Service Management unit: this unit contains the system controller and performs the following
main functions:
– Data collection and exchange with radio system units (SEMF)

– DCC management (MCF)
– Provision of local operator F interface by means a Personal Computer (ECT/RECT)
– Provision of TMN interface based on QB3
– Discrete alarms and controls management
– Remote Inventory management
The unit also manages auxiliary service channels (2 Mbit/s WST and 64 Kbit/s channels), Automatic
Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) and switching function; all the user side accesses for service channels,
discrete alarms (dry loops) and controls, TMN or local Personal Computer are located on the front panel
of the unit.
Power Supply unit: one or two (1+1 configuration only) power supply units can be housed inside the
assembly with the capability to select between –48 to –60 Vdc or ± 24 Vdc primary voltages.
The electrical protection of the RRA/MODEM unit in 1+1 configuration is feasible by adding a proper
subunit inside the assembly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 73 / 326
326
1.3.2 Indoor Unit (Multiplex Assembly)
Refer to the Alcatel 1603 multiplexer instruction book:

1603 SM Alcatel PN 3AL 03018 AAAA

1603 SMX Alcatel PN 3Al 03047 AAAA
1.3.3 Outdoor Unit
Four main parts compose the Outdoor unit:
Cabinet: houses all the RF parts of the system and is available in two different mechanical designs
depending on the configuration, 1+0 Compact or 1+0 Exp./1+1/2+0.
Branching and Filters: according to the radio configuration (refer to the relative paragraph), different types
of branching are available including solutions with channel filters or with wide band filters; the wide band
filter solution is suitable for frequency agility and allows the customer to select the RF transmission channel
over a quarter of the band.
Transceiver: the transceiver unit is composed of the transmitter, the receiver, the local DC/DC converter
and the radio interface unit. The radio interface unit manages the connection between the IDU and the
ODU. Only one IF cable is used for each transceiver; this single cable transports the remote power supply
and some service/alarms signals. Different lengths of cables are used depending on the distance between
the IDU and ODU.
According to the selected type of modulation (128 QAM, 32 QAM, or 16 QAM) different transceiver units
have to be used.
Local Oscillator: For each transceiver, one local oscillator unit must be supplied ; each unit is able to supply
RF for TX and for RX and is characterized by a defined TX/RX frequency distance according to the relative
channel arrangements. Different frequency arrangements require the study and the development of new
local oscillators.
Each local oscillator unit is able to cover a range of about 250 to 300 MHz according to the channel
arrangements involved.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 74 / 326
326
1.4 General system block diagrams
The following general block diagrams summarize the main configurations oavailable with the MDR-9000s
Radio System.
1.4.1 Block diagrams of UHR/UHRC configurations
UHRC
OC3
RRA SW RFCOH MODEM TR
DCCR
SERVICE/ATPC 1x2Mb INTERFACE 1x2Mb
DCCR DCCR
SC
EOW F QB3/SNMP
64Kb
ECT
OS
Fig. 23. 1+0 UHRC
NOTES:
– The UHRC is controlled by the OS through the QB3/SNMP interface.
– ECT can be connected to the UHRC unit through an RS232 interface
– The Service access points are located on the UHRC front panel.
The same also applies to the following UHR block diagrams.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 75 / 326
326
UHR
OC3

DCCR
OC3
1x2Mb
SERVICE/ATPC SW 1x2Mb
DCCR
DCCR
SC
EOW F QB3/SNMP
64Kb
ECT
OS
Fig. 24. 2+0 UHR
UHR
OC3 E
DCCR
P
S
1x2Mb
DCCR
DCCR
SC
EOW F QB3/SNMP
64Kb
ECT
OS
Fig. 25. 1+1 UHR (Frequency Diversity)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 76 / 326
326
UHR
OC3 E
DCCR
P
S
1x2Mb
DCCR
DCCR
SC
F QB3/SNMP
EOW
64Kb
ECT
OS
Fig. 26. 1+1 UHR HST
UHR
RRA SW RFCOH TR (V)
MODEM+XPIC
OC3 E
DCCR
P
S
RRA SW RFCOH MODEM+XPIC TR (H)
1x2Mb
DCCR
DCCR
SC
EOW F QB3/SNMP
64Kb
ECT
OS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 27. 1+1 UHR With Cross–Polarization
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 77 / 326
326
1.4.2 Block diagrams of WMSN configurations
The WMSN configurations can be:

– WMSN–OS (WMSN One Side)

– WMSN–TS (WMSN Two Sides)
2MHz
UHMC UHRC
OC3
SYNC RRA SW RFCOH MODEM TR
OC3 A
3x45 G DCCR
28x1.5
TRIB G
1x2Mb 1x2Mb
SERVICE AUX/ATPC
INTERFACE
DCCM +DCCR DCCR

DCCR
SC SC
64Kb EOW F QB3/SNMP 64Kb EOW F QB3/SNMP

ECT
OS NOT USED
Fig. 28. WMSN–OS Using 1+0 UHRC and UHMC
NOTES:
– The UHM/UHMC is always colocated with the UHR/UHRC
– The UHRC is controlled by the OS through the DCCR channel.
– ECT can be connected to UHMC colocated with UHRC, or can be directly connected to the UHRC.
The same also applies to the WMSN block diagrams on the following pages.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 78 / 326
326
2MHz
UHM UHR
SYNC
E
OC3
A OC3 P DCCR
3x45
28x1.5
S
G RRA SW RFCOH MODEM TR
TRIB G
1x2Mb
SERVICE AUX/ATPC SW 1x2Mb
DCCM +DCCR DCCR

DCCR
SC
SC

ECT
NOT
OS USED
Fig. 29. WMSN–OS Using 1+1 UHR Frequency Diversity
2MHz
UHM UHR
SYNC RRA SW RFCOH MODEM TR

E
OC3
A OC3 P DCCR
3x45
28x1.5 S
G RRA SW RFCOH MODEM TR
TRIB G
1x2Mb
SERVICE AUX/ATPC SW 1x2Mb
DCCM +DCCR DCCR

DCCR
SC
SC

ECT
NOT
OS USED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 30. WMSN–OS Using 1+1 UHR HST
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 79 / 326
326
2MHz
EAST
UHM UHRC
OC3

RRA SW RFCO MODEM TR
SYNC

H
OC3
DCCR DCCR 1x2Mb
3x45
A DCCR
N
28x1.5 O
EOW
TRIB G AUX/ATPC 3x64Kb
T
U
F S
G DCCR
SC E
QB3/SNMPD
F QB3/SNMP N
OC3 O
NOT USED T
SERVICE
EOW U
S
AUX/ATPC 3x64Kb E
DCCM +DCCR D
DCCR 1x2Mb
SC RRA SW RFCO MODEM TR

H
3x64Kb EOW F QB3/SNMP DCCR DCCR DCCR

ECT
OS DCCR WEST
SC
UHRC
F QB3/SNMP
NOT USED
Fig. 31. WMSN–TS Using Two 1+0 UHRC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 80 / 326
326
1.5 Radio Configurations
1.5.1 Introduction
In this paragraph, with the aid of tables, the available radio configurations for the MDR-9000s family are
listed independently from Regenerator or WMSN station types.
The main feasible radio configurations are:
– 1+0 Compact
– 1+0 Expandable Co–Polar (CP)
– 1+0 Expandable Alternate Polar (AP)
– 1+1 HST, 1+1 HST S/D
– 1+1 FD Co–polar
– 1+1 FD Alternate Polar
– 2+0 FD Co–polar
– 2+0 FD Alternate Polar
– 1+1/2+0 with frequency reuse
– 2 x 1+1/2+0 with frequency reuse
N.B. Some configurations are not available in all markets.
Before introducing the configuration tables and the relative notes regarding filter and antenna availability,
the following is to clarify some concepts and to describe different possible choices.
Antennas
The equipment belonging to the MDR-9000s family has been developed to utilize embedded
antennas. Therefore special antennas have been designed with single or double polarization and 30
or 60 cm (12 or 24 in.) diameters. According to the frequency arrangements both diameters can be
available or only the 60 cm (24 in.) can be used for the lower frequency of the MDR-9000s family.
Moreover, the equipment can be connected to standard, non-integrated antennas with different
diameters. In this case, besides the necessary twist or flex twist guides, proper single polar or dual
polar adapters must be supplied to guarantee the connection between the transceiver output and the
guide towards the antenna.
For the above situations, two different types of pole mounting kits are required to guarantee a correct
antenna alignment in the first case or to supply only a simple support for the outdoor cabinet in the
second case.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 81 / 326
326
Branching filters
Depending on the type of configuration and frequency arrangement, two different types of RF filters
can be used with the relative branching kit.

• Wide band filters
These have been designed to allow frequency agility and are able to cover, depending of the
equipment involved, about a quarter of the band (or more). Within their frequency range they
do not require any frequency channel tuning; they are normally used for configuration with only
one TX channel or for configuration with two TX channels connected to different antennas or
different polarization of the same antenna.
No wide band filters are considered for frequency lower than 13 GHz because they can not
ensure operation in the existing RF ETSI mask drawn for typical long indoor systems with
channel filters.
• Channel filters
These are able to cover the whole sub–band (low or high) of a channel arrangement. Being
narrow filters, they have to be factory tuned on a fixed frequency channel. For this reason they
do not support frequency agility and are normally used only for the configurations in frequency
lower than 13 GHz or for configuration with two TX channels connected on the same antenna
polarization for frequency from 13 GHz to 38 GHz.
Alternate polar (AP) or Co–polar (CP)
– The abbreviation AP defines all the configurations with the connection of two RF channels on two
different polarization of the same antenna or on two different antennas. Usually these configurations
use wide band filters and allow the usage of two RF signals with a channel separation equal to the
half that used in co–polar arrangements.
For the AP configuration a dedicated branching kit is available and a choice of the proper Xpol kit
flange has to be made according to the customers request for channel 1 on V pol. and channel 0 on
H pol. or vice versa.
In the case of embedded antennas no additional devices are required with respect to the above
configuration. In the case of a non-integrated antenna a special Xpol adapter has to be supplied to
direct the equipment output towards the antenna.
– The abbreviation CP defines all the configurations with the connection of two RF channels on one
single polarization of an antenna. Normally these configurations utilize narrow band filters and allow
the transmission of two RF signals with a channel separation double that used for the alternate polar
arrangement.
For the CP configuration a dedicate branching kit is available and a choice of the proper Output flange
kit has to be made according to the customers request to transmit on polarization V or polarization
H of the antenna.
Space Diversity
The available configurations for the MDR9000s family do not include Space Diversity with IF
combiner at Base Band level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Only for the HST configuration is there a version with double antenna and protection at the hitless
switch level; the configuration is completely housed in only one 1+1 outdoor cabinet with a double
TX switch (for further information refer to the Branching configuration paragraph).
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 82 / 326
326
Cabinet
Two types of cabinets are available. The first, a compact cabinet, houses one transceiver only and
can be used for the 1+0 Compact version. The second cabinet, larger than the first, houses up to two
transceivers and can be used for the 1+1/2+0 or 1+0 expandable configurations.
Expandable configuration
For a 1+0 expandable configuration, different situations may be present according to the customer
requirements.
Typically an extension at RF level of a 1+0 configuration to a 1+1/2+0 FD (AP or CP), requires a

starting configuration with a 1+1 cabinet sub–equipped from the transceiver and the local oscillator
point of view. For branching with the relevant filters, due to mechanical problems related to the ODU
structure, it is necessary to supply all the necessary items for a 1+1 configuration. This is true for AP
or CP configuration (with or without embedded antenna) and in both cases it is necessary (mandatory
for CP) to know the second RF extension channel frequency. If plans are to equip the ODU with a
second transceiver at a future time, this solution can assure a quite simple extension without traffic
interruption and, if there are no particular problems, it can be performed in field.
If the extension channel is unknown or the need for an extension is planned later, then it is not
possible to add the missing part of the branching in the field without traffic interruption ; the operation
requires removing the 1+1 cabinet and mounting the complete branching in a maintenance center.
In this condition a solution to provide a 1+0 Compact system (from radio point of view) at the
beginning and to add another 1+0 cabinet at a later time can be suitable. Such a case presents a few
advantages like easy installation, no traffic interruption and possibility to choose the extension
channel when really necessary. From the antenna point of view, the two 1+0 systems can have
independent embedded antennas or in case of a non-integrated antenna the second transceiver can
be connected to the second polarization of the existing device.
Considering the real advantages of this solution in terms of installation and maintenance, it is
suggested that this solution be used instead of a traditional 1+1/2+0 AP configuration when no
problems of room (installation of two cabinets), antennas, or future extension are foreseen.
The following must be considered for an extension of 1+1/2+0 configuration to 2 x 1+1/2+0:
• in an AP system the extension (new 1+1 cabinet) requires a new antenna
• in a CP system without embedded antenna the extension can be performed on the second
polarization of the existing device.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 83 / 326
326
1.6 Engineering Order Wire Characteristics
The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association

circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.

The EOW Channel allows the following types of calls:
REGENERATOR WMSN
TYPE OF CALL
No digits No digits
Between two station (selective call) X 2 X 2 or 4 (*)
Between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
Between one and more stations called in selective mode
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
X
ÉÉÉÉ
2 X 2 or 4 (*)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
X 2 or 4 (*)
(multi–selective call, max three users)
(*) To be compliant with the Telecom Specification it is possible to decide (by software pre–setting) to
maintain the two digits also with WMSN.
The above statement:
• limits to 90 the max number of devices linked.
• implies that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identified in the number 00.
The features here below described are available only with WMSN:
– Time checks during a phone’s call
– Automatic ring management (Routing)
1.6.1 Data Channel Characteristics
a) In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
Fig. 32. G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 84 / 326
326
Fig. 33. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface
c) In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 34. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 85 / 326
326
1.7 Synchronization
1.7.1 Introduction

SDH/SONET transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that
form part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
1.7.2 Synchronization in Regenerator station
In this case each incoming STM1/OC3 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line re–timing the transmitted signal by means the
recovered clock.
The regenerator doesn’t need of any other synchronization circuit.
1.7.3 Synchronization in WMSN station
The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITU–T Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The Alcatel 9600 USY radio families are provided with Compact ADM unit inside MUX shelf that supplies
such functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The Compact ADM unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct
or can holdover the ”operation mode” if no input reference is available.
1.7.4 Compact ADM unit implementing synchronization function
In WMSN the synchronization is managed by “Compact ADM unit” accommodated in the Multiplex shelf.
The above unit supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units 1. by selecting the
synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
– select the reference source involved;

– change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
– lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
– work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
The “Compact ADM unit” also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface
according G.703 (T4 signal in G783).
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH/SONET parts (the
selection is accomplished by means of craft terminal).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1. In a radio terminal only the MUX subrack (where the Compact ADM is allocated) units take directly
the synchronism from the internal synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the
synchronism by means of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are
units that do not need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 86 / 326
326
The selection may happen between:
– timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on Compact–ADM (T1 signal in G783)
– timing reference signals coming from the SDH/SONET ports (T1 signal in G783)
– 2.048 Mhz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal)
– 2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783)
The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and
for the external 2 MHz output.
By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of priority
or quality (SSM algorithm) criteria.
a) Priority Algorithm
See Flow chart in Fig. 35. page 89.
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting,for every STM–1
synchronization source:
• LOS (= LOS + MS–AIS + LOF + EXC–BER)

• DRIFT
and for every 2 Mbit/s interface or Synchronous tributary selected as source:
• LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF)

• DRIFT
• LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
b) SSM Algorithm
See Flow chart in Fig. 36. page 90.
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 1015–6.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 87 / 326
326
The PLL can operates in these following different modes:
• Normal

The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.

• Holdover
In absence of an external reference, the ”clock” stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
• Free running
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.
The free running stability is ± 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
Terminal:
• Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
• Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.

If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
• Manual selection of timing source
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.

If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and
automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 88 / 326
326
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level
(i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1)
Fig. 35. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 89 / 326
326
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority level
(i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1)
Fig. 36. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 90 / 326
326
1.8 Equipment control
1.8.1 Introduction
MDR9000s Digital Radio Relay Systems can operate correctly through Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements.
Equipment control can be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an
SDH/SONET Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optical Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and
Cross–Connect Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH/SONET Digital Radio Relay Systems are
part of a Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600 USY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according
to ETSI Standard and ITU–T Rec G.784, G.773 and ITU–R Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process is intrinsically a distributed process based on Manager and
Agent Functions.
To connect SDH/SONET Radio Equipment to a TMN System, Q–type Interfaces are used, adopting the
standard Infomodel based Q–Type Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor
environment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 91 / 326
326
1.8.2 The NE architecture
A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH/SONET NE and therefore according to ITU–T Rec

G.784 they have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.

All the SDH/SONET NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH/SONET Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two
NEs: UHM + UHR). When the RRT has SDH/SONET tributaries, this ability is not strictly required and
therefore the RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly
(Regenerator station equal to the NE UHR/UHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH/SONET frame two Embedded Control
Channels (having as physical interfaces the D1–D3 bytes in the RS–OH and D4–D12 bytes in the MS–OH)
carrying the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels
are terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of
the NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on
the physical interfaces D1–D3 and D4–D12 is a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITU–T Rec
G.784 named Qecc.
While the inter–site or inter–office communications links between SDH/SONET NEs is normally formed
from the SDH/SONET ECCs, within a particular site (intra–site connections) or when the SDH/SONET NE
is acting as Gateway Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the
NE with an Operation System (OS), a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3
type interface and with reference to the foreseen protocol suites:
– QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface,
– QB2 is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface,
– QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802 LAN interface.
The previous Q–type interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an object–oriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these Q–Type TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RS–OH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passed–through.
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted:
– In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly (see Fig. 37. on page 93), on the line side the
DCC bytes of the MS–OH and the RS–OH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the
SEMF or re–routed by the MCF to their destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MS–OH are
reinserted in the SDH/SONET frame, the DCCR bytes of the RS–OH are reinserted in the
SDH/SONET frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection (Radio Channel 1
and 0).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 92 / 326
326
REG. WMSN
(1,0)
TR TR
D1–D3
MD MD
RPS RPS
(1,0)
D4–D12 D4–D12 D4–D12

D1–D3 RRA RRA MUX D1–D3
D1–D3
SEMF SEMF SEMF

F
MCF MCF MCF
F
1320CT 1320CT
QB3 QB3
Fig. 37. DCC management: WMSN case
– In the Regenerator station (Fig. 38. herebelow), while the DCCR of the RS–OH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MS–OH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
REG. REG.
(1,0)
TR TR
D1–D3
MD MD
RPS RPS
(1,0)
(1,0) (1,0)
D4–D12 D4–D12 D4–D12
D1–D3 RRA RRA D1–D3
SEMF SEMF
F F
MCF MCF
1320CT
QB3 QB3
Fig. 38. DCC management: Regenerator case

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 93 / 326
326
1.8.3 The F and Qecc/QB3 interfaces
F interface

The ”F” interface is the control interface connecting locally the Craft Terminal to the Equipment

Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface
is not yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following
protocols:
Physical Layer
• Standard: EIA RS232C/ITU–T V24–V28

• Type: Point–to–point, Asynchronous full Duplex
• Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
• Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
Data Link Layer
• Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol

• ISO 3309 – ISO 4335 – ISO 7809
Qecc/QB3 interfaces
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the
communication interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded
Control Channel) in a SDH/SONET Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the
SDH/SONET Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through a DCN (Data Communication Network). The
Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried
out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
1.8.4 ECT and RECT
ECT
ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320CT.
For each 9600USY station an ALCATEL proprietary SWP package is employed:
• SWP REG. 9600USY and MDR9000s for the Regenerator station
The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enables an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
• Equipment Management
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Transmission Management
• Test management
• External points management
• Alarm (fault) management
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 94 / 326
326
• Synchronization management
• Radio Management
• Performance Monitoring Management
• Event log manager
•
Overhead Management
• Connection Management
• Software Management
• Communication and Routing Management
• Security Management
• Support Management
RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable
SDH/SONET NEs in the SDH/SONET.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.

RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE
pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence
inter–area communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:
1) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
2) The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
3) The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
4) Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
5) The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
6) In a SDH/SONET network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function
are 32 and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT
function are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as ”small SDH/SONET network”
for which the RECT function may substitute the Element Manager.
N.B. Refer to CT Operator’s Handbooks listed in Tab. 2. on page 17 and Tab. 4. on page 18 for
further information on:
– HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 95 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
96 / 326
2 DESCRIPTION OF UHR/UHRC SUBSYSTEM
2.1 Introduction
The functions of the MDR-9000s UHR/UHRC subsystem and its logical connections with the optionally
equipped 1603SM UHM/UHMC subsystem (IDU–MUX) have already been introduced in other sections
of this handbook. In particular, parts that can be referenced are:
– Introduction to the System: para.1.1 on page 67
– Network Applications: para.1.2 on page 70
– General functional description: para.1.3 on page 72
– Block diagrams: para.1.4.1 on page 75 and para.1.4.2 on page 78
– Radio configurations: para.1.5 on page 81
The baseband terminal regenerator (RRA) is developed to support the outdoor radio transceiver in all the
required RF bands.
The system operates as regenerator sections with OC-3 optical or STM1 electrical interfacing.
In addition to the main traffic, one 2 Mbit/s WST traffic can be provided. This 2 Mbit/s signal is transmitted
using RFCOH complementary overhead.
The Engineering Order Wire 3x64 Kbit/s and 1x 9.600 Kbit/s channels are implemented as service
channels.
Large baseband circuitry integration allows great reductions in consumption and physical dimensions of
the unit. The same board is used on the two baseband system types.
This is the result of using two highly integrated boards called RRA/MODEM 128QAM, RRA/MODEM
32QAM, or RRA/MODEM 16QAM and Auxiliary Service & Management (SAM).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 97 / 326
326
2.2 Part lists
This paragraph provides the layout tables related to each equipment configuration of the MDR-9000s Split
Mount transceiver assembly using the UHR/UHRC subsystem:

REFER TO
REGENERATOR EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
TABLE PAGE
n1 1+0 Compact (1+0 UHRC) Tab. 12. 99
n2 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR) Tab. 13. 101
1+1 HST (1+1 UHR);

n 3–4 Tab. 14. 104
1+1 HST Space diversity
n5 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR) Tab. 15. 107
n6 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1 UHR) Tab. 16. 110
n7 1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization and XPIC option (1+1 UHR) Tab. 17. 113
The Regenerator tables (Tab. 12. page 99 through Tab. 17. page 113) can be used to define all the
equipment configurations based on Regenerator.
The tables indicate:
– Name
– Alcatel Part No. – (e.g. 3DB xxxxx xxxx)
– Maximum quantity
– Position
– Number of explanatory notes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 98 / 326
326
Tab. 12. Regenerator equipment configuration (n 1); 1+0 Compact (1+0 UHRC)
NAME ALCATEL MAX POS. NOTES

P/N Qty ON FIG.
IDU (see Fig. 39. on page 100)

1+0 REGENERATOR SUBRACK 3DB00216AAAA 1 PI 1
–48 to –60 V DC/DC CONVERTER 3DB00090AAAA 1 PI 2
LAMP CONNECTION (1+0) 3DB00278AAAA 1 PI 3
RRA MODEM 128 QAM 3DB00144AAAA 1 PI 5 A (phase out)
RRA MODEM 128 QAM 3DB02289AAAA 1 PI 5 2–8
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB00xxxAAAA 1 PI 5 2–9
RRA STM–1 ELECT. INTERFACE 3DB00304AAAA 1 PI 6
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE FC/ 3AL78815AAAB 1 PI 6 3
PC
S–1.1 OPTICAL 3AL78815ABAB 1 PI 6
INTERFACE SC/PC
AUX SERVICE & MANAGEMENT 3DB00143AAAA 1 PI 4
FLASH CARD 80 MB 1AB152050001 1 PI 12
RRA/MOD+SERVICE FRONT 3DB00271AAAA 1 PI 7
PLATE KIT
ODU (see Fig. 40. on page 100)
1+0 CABINET KIT 3DB00250AAAA 1 PO 1 4
1+0 CABINET 3DB01602AAAA 1 PO 1 5
SERVICE KIT 3DB00511AAAA 1
TRANSCEIVER 128 * 1 PO 2
TRANSCEIVER 32 * 1 PO 2 1–6
TRANSCEIVER 16 * 1 PO 2
L.O. * 1 PO 3 1
ODU – BRANCHING & FILTERS (see Fig. 40. on page 100)
1+0 NOT EXP * PO 4
1
BRANCHING KIT
1+0 NOT EXP Narrow Band Filter * PO 4 7
1
BRANCHING KIT
WIDE BAND FILTER * * PO 6 1
FILTER * * PO 6
INSTALLATION MATERIALS B
SOFTWARE C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 99 / 326
326
PI 1 PI 3
PI 4
PI 5 PI 12

PI 2
PI 7
PI 6
Fig. 39. IDU 1+0 Compact (1+0 UHRC)
PO 6
PO 6
PO 2
PO 3
PO 4 PO 4
PO 1
Fig. 40. ODU 1+0

Notes to Tab. 12. :
1 Depends on RF channel frequency
2 Units RRA/MODEM in alternative
3 Electrical/Optical interfaces in alternative
4 Only for 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz
5 Only for 6L, 6U, 7.4, 8.2, 11 GHz
6 Tranceivers in alternative
7 Branching kits in alternative
8 Not available for 38 GHz
9 Not available for 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13 ,15 GHz
A This P/N is no longer produced. It is left in the table as information for previous supplies
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
B Make reference to Handbook Ref. [2] on page 17

C Make reference to Handbooks listed on page 17
* See in Tab. 41. on page 294 the Appendix corresponding to the proper RF frequency band
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 100 / 326
326
Tab. 13. Regenerator equipment configuration (n 2); 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR)
ALCATEL MAX POS. NOTES
NAME
P/N Qty ON FIG. (page 103)

–48 to –60 V DC/DC CONVERTER 3DB00090AAAA 1 PI 2
FANS UNIT 3DB00154AAAA 1 PI 3
RRA MODEM 128 QAM 3DB02289AAAA 1 PI 5 2 – 11
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB00xxxAAAA 1 PI 5 2 – 12
RRA STM–1 ELECT. INTERFACE 3DB00304AAAA 1
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE FC/PC 3AL78815AAAB 1 PI 6 3
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE SC/PC 3AL78815ABAB 1
RRA/MOD FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00272AAAA 1 PI 7
SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00279AAAA 1 PI 9
PW.S FRONT COVER PLATE 3DB00282AAAA 1 PI 10
FRONT COVER PLATE H30 3DB00281AAAA 1 PI 8
SERVICE FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00273AAAA 1 PI 11
1+1 CABINET KIT 3DB00249AAAA 1 4
PO 1
1+1 CABINET AP 3DB01671AAAA 1 5
Local Oscillator * 1 PO 3 1
1+1/2+0 BRANCHING FD KIT * 1 7–8–9
1+1/2+0 XPOL BRANCHING KIT * 1 7 – 8 – 10
PO 4
1+1/2+0 XPOL Narrow Band Filter
* 1 7–8–9
BRANCHING KIT
ANV MAX POS. NOTES
NAME
KIT ADAPTERS 1+1 3DB00781AAAA 1
CIRCULATOR WR42 * 1 PO 5
WIDE BAND FILTER * * 1 – 10
PO 6
FILTER * * 1–9
SOFTWARE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 101 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
PO6
PO5
PI 6
PI 5
955.203.322 M
PO4
PI 4
PI 12
PO3
PI 1
PI 9
PO2
PI 8
PI 7
PI 11
PI 3
Fig. 41. IDU 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR)
Fig. 42. ODU 1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR)
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
PI 2
PI 10
PO6
PO1
102 / 326
Notes to Tab. 13. :
1 Depending on RF channel frequency

4 Only for 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz

5 Only for 6L, 6U, 7.4, 8.2, 11 GHz AP configuration
Branching kit to use when the configuration is extendible to HET or to cross–polarization
8
1+1/2+0 s ystem
9 Not Frequency agility
10 Frequency agility
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 103 / 326
326
Tab. 14. Regenerator equip.config. (n 3–4); 1+1 HST (1+1 UHR); 1+1 HST with space diversity
NAME ALCATEL MAX POS. NOTES

P/N Qty ON FIG.

–48 to –60 V DC/DC CONVERTER 3DB00090AAAA 2 PI 2/10
FANS SUBSTITUTE 3DB00277AAAA 1 PI 3
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB00xxxAAAA 2 PI 5 2–9
RRA STM–1 ELECT. INTERFACE 3DB00304AAAA 2 PI 6 3
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE FC/PC 3AL78815AAAB 2 PI 6 3
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE SC/PC 3AL78815ABAB 2 PI 6 3
MASKING PLATE COMPLETE 3AN49453AAAA 2 PI 6 3–10
SUBSTITUTIVE INTERFACE 3DB00327AAAA 2 PI 6 A (phase out)
RRA/MOD FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00272AAAA 2 PI 7 / 8
1+1 ELECTR. SWITCH 3DB00276AAAA 1 PI 9 4–10
SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00279AAAA 1 PI 9 4

1+1 CABINET KIT 3DB00249AAAA 1 PO 1
TRANSCEIVER 128 * 1 PO 2 1 – 12
L.O. * 1 PO 3 1

1+1 HST BRANCHING KIT * 1 PO 4 13
1+1 HST NBF BRANC. KIT * 1 PO 4 13
1+1 HST S.D. BRANC. KIT * 1 PO 4 13
1+1 HST S.D. NBF BRAN. KIT * 1 PO 4 13
10 DB DIRECT. COUPLER * 1 PO 7 11
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3 DB DIRECT. COUPLER * 1 PO 7 11
WIDE BAND FILTER * * PO 6 1
FILTER * * PO 6 1
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 104 / 326
326
Tab. 14. Regenerator equip.config. (n 3–4); 1+1 HST (1+1 UHR); 1+1 HST with space diversity
SOFTWARE C
PI 1
PI 12
PI 9 PI 3
PI 4
PI 5
PI 10
PI 2
PI 6
PI 11
PI 8
PI 7
Fig. 43. IDU 1+1 HST (1+0 UHR)
PO2
PO3 PO6
PO6
PO1
P07
P05
PO4
PO2
Fig. 44. ODU 1+1 HST (1+1 UHR)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 105 / 326
326
Notes to Tab. 14. :


4 “1+1 ELECTR. SWITCH” and “SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT” in alternative
7 Couplers in alternative
10 With unit “1+1 ELECTR. SWITCH” use the “MASKING PLATE COMPLETE”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 106 / 326
326
Tab. 15. Regenerator equip.config. (n 5); 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR)
NAME

1+1 REGENERATOR
3DB00215AAAA 1 PI 1
SUBRACK
–48 to –60 V DC/DC
3DB00090AAAA 2 PI 2/10
CONVERTER
RRA MODEM 128 QAM 3DB02289AAAA 2 2–7
PI 5
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB0xxxxAAAA 2 2–8
RRA STM–1 ELECT.
3DB00304AAAA 2
INTERFACE
3
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE FC/PC 3AL78815AAAB 2 PI 6
S–1.1 OPTICAL INTERFACE SC/PC 3AL78815ABAB 2
MASKING PLATE COMPLETE 3AN49453AAAA 2 3–4
AUX SERVICE &
3DB00143AAAA 1 PI 4
MANAGEMENT
RRA/MOD FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00272AAAA 2 PI 7 / 8
1+1 ELECTR. SWITCH 3DB00276AAAA 1 5–4
PI 9
SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00279AAAA 1 5
1+1 CABINET KIT 3DB00249AAAA 1 PO 1
TRANSCEIVER 128 * 1 1–6
PO 2
1+1/2+0 BRANCHING HET KIT * 1 PO 4
CHAN. FILTER * * PO 6 1
SOFTWARE C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 107 / 326
326
PI 12 PI 1
PI 4 PI 9 PI 3

PI 5

PI 10
PI 2
PI 6 PI 11
PI 8
PI 7
Fig. 45. IDU 1+1 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR)
PO2
PO3 PO1
PO6
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO2
Fig. 46. ODU 1+1 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 108 / 326
326
Notes to Tab. 15. :
3 Electrical/Optical/Substitutive interfaces in alternative

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 109 / 326
326
Tab. 16. Regenerator equip. config. (n 6); 1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1UHR)
ANV MAX POS. NOTES
NAME

1+1 REGENERATOR
3DB00215AAAA 1 PI 1
SUBRACK
–48 to –60 V DC/DC
3DB00090AAAA 2 PI 2–10
CONVERTER
RRA MODEM 128 QAM 3DB02289AAAA 2 2–5
PI 5
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB0xxxxAAAA 2 2–6
RRA STM–1 ELECT.
3DB00304AAAA 2
INTERFACE
S–1.1 OPTICAL
3AL78815AAAB 2 PI 6 3
INTERFACE FC/PC
S–1.1 OPTICAL
3AL78815ABAB 2
INTERFACE SC/PC
AUX SERVICE &
3DB00143AAAA 1 PI 4
MANAGEMENT
RRA/MOD FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00272AAAA 2 PI 7–8
SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00279AAAA 1 PI 9
1+0 CABINET KIT 3DB00250AAAA 2 7
PO 1
1+0 CABINET 3DB01602AAAA 2 8
1+0 NOT EXP
* 2 PO 4
BRANCHING KIT
CHAN. FILTER * * PO 6 1
SOFTWARE C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 110 / 326
326
PI 12 PI 1
PI 9 PI 3
PI 4
PI 5
PI 10
PI 2
PI 6
PI 11
PI 8
PI 7
Fig. 47. IDU 1+1 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1 UHR)
PO 7
PO 7
PO 2
PO 3
PO 4 PO 4
PO 1
Fig. 48. ODU 1+0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 111 / 326
326
Notes to Tab. 16. :


7 Only for 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz
8 Only for 6L, 6U, 7.4, 8.2, 11 GHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 112 / 326
326
Tab. 17. Regen. equip.config. (n 7); 1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization and XPIC option (1+1 UHR)
NAME

1+1 REGENERATOR
3DB00215AAAA 1 PI 1
SUBRACK
–48 to –60 V DC/DC
3DB00090AAAA 2 PI 2/10
CONVERTER
RRA MODEM 32 QAM 3DB0xxxxAAAA 2 PI 5 2 – 10
RRA STM–1 ELECT.
3DB00304AAAA 2
INTERFACE
S–1.1 OPTICAL
3AL78815AAAB 2 3
INTERFACE FC/PC PI 6
S–1.1 OPTICAL
3AL78815ABAB 2
INTERFACE SC/PC
MASKING PLATE COMPLETE 3AN49453AAAA 2 3–4
AUX SERVICE &
3DB00143AAAA 1 PI 4
MANAGEMENT
RRA/MOD FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00272AAAA 2 PI 7
1+1 ELECTR. SWITCH 3DB00276AAAA 1 5–4
PI 9
SWITCH FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB00279AAAA 1 5
1+1 CABINET KIT 3DB00249AAAA 1
PO 1
1+1 CABINET AP 3DB01671AAAA 1 6
PO 2
1+1/2+0 XPOL
* 1
BRANCHING KIT
PO 4 8
1+1/2+0 XPOL Narrow Band Filter
* 1
BRANCHING KIT
ANV MAX POS. NOTES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NAME
WIDE BAND FILTER * * 1
PO 6
FILTER * * 1
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 113 / 326
326
Tab. 17. Regen. equip.config. (n 7); 1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization and XPIC option (1+1 UHR)
XPIC OPTION
On IDU (see Fig. 49. and Fig. 50. on page 115)

XPIC BOARD 3DB01021AAAA 2 PI 12
XPIC CABLE KIT 3DB01938AAAA 1 PI 13/14
11
RRA/MOD + XPIC FRONT PLATE KIT 3DB0274AAAA 1 PI 8
On ODU – BRANCHING & FILTERS (see Fig. 51. )
XPIC KIT ADAPTER * 1 or 2
PO 7
XPIC BRANCHING KIT * 1
SOFTWARE C
Notes to Tab. 17. :

3 Electrical/Optical/Substitutive interfaces in alternative
6 Only for 6L, 6U, 7.4, 8.2, 11 GHz configuration
– Not available for 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13 ,15 GHz
10
– Cannot house XPIC option
XPIC option is possible with:
11 – 128 QAM STM–1 board used in STM–1 modality
– frequencies indicated in Tab. 41. on page 294
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 114 / 326
326
PI 12 PI 1
PI 4 PI 9 PI 3
PI 5
PI 10
PI 2
PI 6
PI 11
PI 7
PI 8
Fig. 49. IDU 1+1/2+0 cross polarization (1+1 UHR)
PI 12
PI 13
(XPIC Board)
(IF connection)
PI 14
(Synchronism connection)
Fig. 50. RRA/MODEM with XPIC option

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 115 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
PO6
PO3
955.203.322 M
PO2
PO4
PO2
Fig. 51. ODU 1+1/2+0 cross polarization (1+1 UHR)
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
PO6
PO7
PO1
116 / 326
2.3 UHR/UHRC Equipment and Unit physical views
In the following, the physical views of UHR/UHRC equipment are given in the various configurations of:
– IDU Regenerator Baseband, starting on this page

– ODU - Transceiver, starting on page 132
2.4 IDU Regenerator Baseband physical views
The IDU Regenerator, urban link, is based on two subrack configurations:
– Regenerator 1+0 compact
– Regenerator 1+0 extendible, 1+1, 2+0
The physical views given in the following are:
– IDU Regenerator 1+0 compact on page 118
– 1+0 Extendible IDU Regenerator on page 119
– 1+1 / 2+0 IDU Regenerator on page 120
– 1+1 / 2+0 Frequency Reuse XPIC IDU Regenerator on page 121
Detailed physical views, connector pinouts and hardware presettings are:
– SAM Unit:
• front view and connectors pinout on page 122
• hardware presettings on page 126
– RRA/MODEM Unit:
• front view on page 129
• hardware presettings on page 129
– RRA EPS Unit front view on page 130
– Power Supply Units front view and connector pinout on page 130
– Fans Unit front view and connector pinout on page 131
– Lamp Connection (1+0) front view and connector pinout on page 131
N.B. Starting from Ed.02 of this handbook, the physical views given in next paragraphs show the new
boards’ front plates, which include explanatory symbols and writings. Effective supply to
Customers of boards with these new front plates will start in the second mid 2001. This
information does not imply any obligation for Alcatel to replace or upgrade items already
supplied or going to be delivered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 117 / 326
326
2.4.1 IDU Regenerator 1+0 compact physical view
The IDU UHRC Regenerator is accommodated in one subrack with the following dimensions:

– width 450 mm / 17.73 in.

– height 44.5 mm / 1.75 in.
– depth 240 mm / 9,45 in.
The mechanical structure adopted complies with 19 ” standard practice.

This subrack can be also inserted in a standard 19” rack, placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
The following figure shows the 1+0 UHRC equipment.
A B D C
Fig. 52. IDU 1+0 UHRC
A) Aux Service & Management board (SAM); see details in para.2.4.5 on page 122 and para.2.4.6
on page 126
B) RRA/MODEM 128 QAM or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM board; see details in para.2.4.7 on page 129 and
para.2.4.8 on page 129
C) Power Supply; see details in para.2.4.10 on page 130
D) Lamp Connection (1+0); see details in para.2.4.12 on page 131

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 118 / 326
326
2.4.2 1+0 Extendible IDU Regenerator physical view
The 1+1 IDU Regenerator is accommodated in a subrack with the following dimensions:
– width 450 mm / 17.73 in.

– height 88.9 mm / 3.50 in.

– depth 240 mm / 9.45 in.
In the extendible IDU subrack the system can be configured as Regenerator 1+0 extendible to 1+1 HET.
A B D C
SAM
MAIN–1
Fig. 53. IDU 1+0 UHR Extendible
on page 126
B) RRA/MODEM 128 QAM or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM board; see details in para.2.4.7 on page 129 and
D) Fans Unit; see details in para.2.4.11 on page 131

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 119 / 326
326
2.4.3 1+1/2+0 IDU Regenerator physical view
The 1+1 IDU Regenerator is accommodated in a subrack with the following dimensions:

– width 450 mm / 17.73 in.

– height 88.9 mm / 3.50 in.
– depth 240 mm / 9.45 in.
The following system configurations are possible with the 1+1 IDU subrack:
– Regenerator 1+0 extendible

– Regenerator 1+1 HST or F.D.
– Regenerator 2+0
– Regenerator 2+0 East/West
A B B E D C
SAM
STBY–0
MAIN–1
Fig. 54. 1+1 / 2+0 UHR
on page 126
B) RRA/MODEM 128 QAM or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM boards; see details in para.2.4.7 on page 129 and
E) RRA EPS; see details in para.2.4.9 on page 130

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 120 / 326
326
2.4.4 1+1/2+0 Frequency Reuse XPIC IDU Regenerator physical view
The 1+1 XPIC IDU Regenerator is accommodated in a subrack with the following dimensions:
– width 450 mm / 17.73 in.

– height 88.9 mm / 3.50 in.

– depth 240 mm / 9.45 in.
The following system configurations are possible with the 1+1 IDU subrack:
– Regenerator 1+0 extendible

– Regenerator 1+1/2+0 Frequency reuse with XPIC
A B B E D C
SAM
CH–0
CH–1
Fig. 55. IDU 1+1 /2+0 UHR FR XPIC
on page 126
B) RRA/MODEM 128 QAM STM1 boards; see details in para.2.4.7 page 129 and para.2.4.8 page 129
E) RRA EPS; see details in para.2.4.9 on page 130

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 121 / 326
326
2.4.5 SAM Unit front view and connectors pinout

4) I/0 * BNC Lan Ethernet

5) Alarms,housekeeping,
and Prx analog measure
2) RJ45 Lan Ethernet
3) I/O WST
1) LEDs
6) Alarm Storing 8) EOW jack
10)Lamp test
11) Lamp reset
9) RS–232 for F interface
7) Service channels
LEGEND:
1) LEDs (details in Fig. 57. on page 123)
2) RJ45 Lan Ethernet
3) I/O WST (details in Fig. 56. on page 122)
4) I/O * BNC Lan Ethernet
5) Alarms, housekeeping, and Prx analog measure (details in Tab. 18. on page 124)
6) Alarm storing button
7) Service channels (details in Tab. 19. on page 125)
8) EOW Telephone jack
9) RS–232 for F interface
10) Lamp test button
11) Lamp reset
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 56. Auxiliary service (SAM) front view
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 122 / 326
326
IND ABN MINOR EOW free
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
YELLOW ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ YELLOW RED GREEN
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
RED YELLOW RED YELLOW
CARD FAIL ATTD MAJOR EOW busy
Fig. 57. SAM board’s LEDs position, colour and meaning
STBY–0
CH–0
MAIN–1
CH–1
OUTPUT INPUT
N.B. In UHRC only MAIN–1 connectors are present

Fig. 58. SAM board’s I/O WEST 2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm unbalanced connectors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 123 / 326
326
Tab. 18. SAM board’s Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40 pins connector
Alarm characteristics

– open contact : "72 volt < V <–2 volt I < 0.2 mA

– closed contact : "72 volt < V < 0 volt I < 50 mA
Alarm Pin Description

HK IN 1 1 Housekeeping input
GA–OUT1 9 General alarm output
GA–OUT2 10 General alarm output
HK OUT 1 11 Housekeeping output
Com–rele A 15 Comune relay
MAJOR 16 Major Alarm
MINOR 17 Minor Alarm
WAR 18 Warning Alarm
ABN 19 Abnormal
Com–rele B 20 Comune relay
TORC 21 Auxiliary battery remote alarm OR’ing
TANC 22 Auxiliary battery remote alarm AND’ing
EXT 23 External alarm (LOS)
INT 24 Local alarm
LOSQ3 25 Loss of dialog with OS
Com–rele C 26 Common relay
FAN 27 FAN unit fail
SERV 28 SAM unit fail
RRA–MD 29 RRA unit fail
TR 30 TR unit fail
HBER 31 High BER
Com–rele D 32 Common relay
LBER 33 Low BER
CH–0 aff. 34 Channel 0 alarmed
CH–1 aff. 35 Channel 1 alarmed
SA aff. 36 Service Affecting
TOR 37 Main battery alarm OR’ing
TAND 38 Main battery alarm AND’ing
PRX 1 39 Rx 1 Power
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
PRX 0 40 Rx 0 Power
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 124 / 326
326
Tab. 19. SAM board’s Service channels on SCSI 26 pins connector
2 x 64kbit/s G.703 service channel

1 x 64kbit/s V.11 service channel

1 x 9600 baud (V.28)

2 x party line ports voice frequency
NET Name Pin Description Interface

TXA+ 1 64kbit/s data channel output port A G703
TXA– 14 64kbit/s data channel output port A G703
RXA+ 2 64kbit/s data channel input port A G703
RXA– 15 64kbit/s data channel input port A G703
TXB+ 3 64kbit/s data channel output port B G703
TXB– 16 64kbit/s data channel output port B G703
RXB+ 4 64kbit/s data channel input port B G703
RXB– 17 64kbit/s data channel input port B G703
RXA+VF 5 Analog party line input path A voice
RXA–VF 18 Analog party line input path A voice
TXA+VF 6 Analog party line output path A voice
TXA–VF 19 Analog party line output path A voice
RXB+VF 7 Analog party line input path B voice
RXB–VF 20 Analog party line input path B voice
TXB+VF 8 Analog party line output path B voice
TXB–VF 21 Analog party line output path B voice
RX+V11 9 64kbit/s data channel positive input V11
RX–V11 22 64kbit/s data channel negative input V11
TX+V11 10 64kbit/s data channel positive output V11
TX–V11 23 64kbit/s data channel negative output V11
CK+RX 11 Rx clock positive output V11
CK–RX 24 Rx clock negative output V11
CK+TX 12 Tx clock positive output V11
CK–TX 25 Tx clock negative output V11
TXSPV 13 9.6 kbit/s data channel input V24–V28
RXSPV 26 9.6 kbit/s data channel output V24–V28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 125 / 326
326
2.4.6 SAM Unit hardware presettings
N.B. Refer to MSZZQ document relative to SAM board for the TC and Dip–Switch physical position
on the board (see Tab. 47. on page 324).

a) SAM TC7
STATUS DESCRIPTION
CLOSED AND OR with 24 V service battery
OPEN AND OR with 48/60 V service battery
b) SAM Switch I2
These dip switches define the Basic Equipment Type and the BackPlane Version.
The setting can depend on the used Software Package version and is detailed in the section
“Introduction” of the relevant CT Operator’s Handbook.
Tab. 20. SAM Switch I2
N.B. Before using this table for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that the
values correspond to those stated in the CT Operator’s Handbook associated with the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operator’s Handbook, the latter
will prevail.
DIP–SWITCH I2 (INSIDE)
DESCRIPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UHRC Urban Haul split mount Regenerator

1 0 1 0 0 0 0
compact
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 UHR Urban Haul split mount Regenerator

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 126 / 326
326
c) SAM Switch I3
These dip switches define the basic Equipment Type:

• UHRC, see following Tab. 21. below

• UHR, see following Tab. 22. on page 128
and its characteristics in terms of configuration (i.e.: 1+0, 1+1, ..., STM–0, STM–1, WST setttings,
FD, FD–COMP, ..).
Their setting can depend on the used Software Package version and is detailed in the section
“Introduction” of the relevant CT Operator’s Handbook.
N.B. Before using Tab. 21. or Tab. 22. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operator’s Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operator’s Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
Tab. 21. SAM Switch I3 (fields for UHRC)
SLOT–ID
CONFIG
CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION
N. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1+0 – STM–0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 1+0 – STM–1 and NO WST 1 0 0 0 0 0
3 1+0 – STM–1 and WST 0 1 0 0 0 0
Dip–Switches I3 7–8 not used

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 127 / 326
326
Tab. 22. SAM Switch I3 (fields for UHR)
C Configuration Description Dip–switch I3
O

N SLOT–ID
S

F IDU ODU
I T WST System Type
Subrack Subrack
G M 1 2 3 4 5 6
2+0
1 FD SRODU–FD 0 0 0 0 0 0
1+0 EXP
SRIDU–20
2+0 SRODU–C
2 FD–COMP 1 0 0 0 0 0
1+0 EXP (**)
0 NO 1+1
3 FD SRODU–FD 0 1 0 0 0 0
1+0 (*)
4 1+1 HST SRIDU–11 SRODU–HST 1 1 0 0 0 0
1+1 SRODU–C
5 FD–COMP 0 0 1 0 0 0
1+0 (*) (**)
2+0
6 FD SRODU–FD 1 0 1 0 0 0
1+0 EXP
SRIDU–20
2+0 SRODU–C
7 FD–COMP 0 1 1 0 0 0
1+0 EXP (**)
8 1 NO 1+1 HST SRODU–HST 1 1 1 0 0 0
1+1
9 FD SRODU–FD 0 0 0 1 0 0
1+0 (*) SRIDU–11
1+1 SRODU–C
10 FD–COMP 1 0 0 1 0 0
1+0 (*) (**)
2+0
11 FD SRODU–FD 0 1 0 1 0 0
1+0 EXP
SRIDU–20
2+0 SRODU–C
12 FD–COMP 1 1 0 1 0 0
1+0 EXP (**)
1 CH1&0 UNP
1+1
13 FD SRODU–FD 0 0 1 1 0 0
1+0 (*)
SRIDU–11
1+1 SRODU–C
14 FD–COMP 1 0 1 1 0 0
1+0 (*) (**)
2+0
15 FD SRODU–FD 0 1 1 1 0 0
1+0 EXP
SRIDU–20
2+0 SRODU–C
16 FD–COMP 1 1 1 1 0 0
1+0 EXP (**)
17 1 CH1&0 PR 1+1 HST SRODU–HST 0 0 0 0 1 0
1+1
18 FD SRODU–FD 1 0 0 0 1 0
1+0 (*) SRIDU–11
1+1 SRODU–C
19 FD–COMP 0 1 0 0 1 0
1+0 (*) (**)
Dip–Switches I3 7–8 not used
(*) In this cases ’1+0’ means ’1+1 subequipped’. Do not use these configurations for 1+0 Expandable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(**) SRODU–C corresponds to 2 x ODU compact in 1+1/2+0 configuration and to 1 x ODU compact in
1+0/1+0 EXP configurations
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 128 / 326
326
2.4.7 RRA/MODEM Unit front view
Fig. 59. below shows the front view of RRA/MODEM board in the XPIC configuration. In the other
configurations the IF XPIC Input is not present.
IF XPIC Input IF out to XPIC IF in/out

IF monitoring point towards ODU
Internal Bus
Optical or electrical interface
Direct VI MANAGER
Interface
RT fail
RRA/MODEM fail
Fig. 59. RRA/MODEM unit front view (with XPIC)
N.B. On the OC-3 Optical/Electrical interface of RRA/MODEM board, the following modules can be
alternatively equipped:
– in the case where the co–located UHM/UHMC is not equipped:
• STM–1 Electrical Module
or:
• OC-3 Optical Module
– in the case where the co–located UHM/UHMC is equipped:
• STM–1 Electrical Module used to connect the equivalent module on one of OC-3 port
on COMPACT ADM1/1 board of UHM/UHMC
or:
• MASKING PLATE COMPLETE (see Tab. 14. page 104, Tab. 15. page 107,
Tab. 17. page 113), in case no electrical/optical module has to be equipped, i.e. in
the 1+1 configurations where STM–1 connection between UHR and UHM is done
through RRA/EPS unit. See an example in Fig. 142. on page 216.
2.4.8 RRA/MODEM Unit hardware presettings
Refer to MSZZQ document relative to RRA–MODEM board for the Dip–Switch physical position on the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
board and the possible settings (choosing the unit type used between those listed in Tab. 47. on page
324).
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 129 / 326
326
2.4.9 RRA EPS Unit front view

OUTPUT

CMI
75 ohm
INPUT
CMI
75 ohm
Fig. 60. RRA EPS interface
2.4.10 Power Supply Units front view and connector pinout
ON/OFF Switch
VB1
VB2
Correct operation green LED
Fig. 61. UHR/UHRC Power Supply Unit front view
Tab. 23. UHR/UHRC Power Supply Unit connector pinout
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 –BATT –Battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 130 / 326
326
2.4.11 Fans Unit front view and connector pinout
Rack Lamp
connector
Fig. 62. UHR/UHRC Fans Unit front view
Tab. 24. UHR/UHRC Fans Unit’s Station Alarms connector pinout
PINS ALARMS MEANING

1 +VSERV +Service battery
2 Not used
3 RATTD Yellow storing LED switch on
4 RMAJOR Red Major LED switch on
5 RMINOR Red Minor LED switch on
6 –VSERV –Service battery
7 CH Green LED switch on (buzzer)
8 TOR Remote alarm 1 battery failure
9 GND GROUND
2.4.12 Lamp Connection (1+0) front view and connector pinout
In UHRC configuration the Fans Unit is not equipped. The Lamp Connection (1+0) kit envisaged for this
configuration (see Tab. 12. on page 99) provides the same connector depicted in above para.2.4.11.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 131 / 326
326
2.5 ODU - Transceiver physical views
The ODU transceiver of the regenerator receives DC power through a coaxial cable connected to the IDU
unit. The same coax cable is used for signal transit.

Specifically for signals:
– IF Transmission
– IF Receiver
– Monitoring signal
The cabinet mechanical structure allows outdoor installation.
Each Radio Transceiver (ODU) is equipped with the following units:
– Branching
– Transceiver unit
Branching consists of:
– Filters
– Isolator and Circulator
– Interconnections
– RF Switch (HST version)
The Transceiver unit consists of:
– RF circuits Tx and Rx
– IF circuits Tx and Rx
– Local oscillator
– Service and alarm processing
– DC/DC converter
1+1 configuration requires unit duplication.
The physical views given in the following are:
– 1+0 Compact ODU Transceiver on page 133
– External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 on page 134
– 1+1 ODU co–polar frequency diversity Transceiver on page 135
– 1+1 ODU HST Transceiver on page 136
– 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar Transceiver on page 137
– 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar with XPIC Transceiver on page 138
N.B. The figures are enclosed for general information only and the layout corresponds to the 18 GHz
Tranceivers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 132 / 326
326
2.5.1 1+0 compact ODU Transceiver physical view
The IF/RF components of the system are designed to enable installation close to the antenna. The
systems comprise a compact outdoor unit with an integrated or optionally remote antenna.
The Transceiver is accommodated in a 260x90x342mm dimensioned outdoor water–resistant cabinet.

12
8
11
10
3
7
9
1
14 5 4
13
Fig. 63. ODU 1+0 Transceiver physical view
1) Water–resistant cabinet
2) Transceiver
3) Local oscillator
4) Branching 1+0
5) Antenna circulator
6) Receiver RF filter
7) Transmitter RF filter
8) DC/DC converter (not visible in figure)
9) IF Transmitter circuits
10) IF Receiver circuits
11) RF Transmitter circuits-
12) RF Receiver circuits
13) IDU–ODU I/O cable connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
14) PSK I/O cable connection
An additional solar shield can be provided as options.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 133 / 326
326
2.5.2 External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0

I/O CABLE
PSK CONNECTION
FOR TR 0
I/O CABLE
PSK CONNECTION
FOR TR 1
I/O CABLE
IDU–ODU CONNECTION
FOR TR 0
I/O CABLE
IDU–ODU CONNECTION
FOR TR 1
N.B. In 1+0 EXP configuration, only TR 1 exists
Fig. 64. External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 134 / 326
326
2.5.3 1+1 ODU co–polar frequency diversity Transceiver physical view
1+0 extendible/ 1+1 (by means of a single RT or a pair of RTs in protected configurations)
Dimensions 268x277x250 mm / 10.56x10.91x9.85 in.

8
10
6
3 1
4
7
5 8
2 3
Fig. 65. 1+1 Co–polar frequency diversity
2) Transceiver
3) Local oscillator
4) Branching 1+1
8) DC/DC converter
An additional solar shield can be provided as an option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 135 / 326
326
2.5.4 1+1 ODU HST Transceiver physical view
1+1 HST Transceiver single antenna.

Dimensions 268x277x250 mm / 10.56x10.91x9.85 in.

8
10
6
3
7
7
8
4
5 2 3
Fig. 66. 1+1 HST
2) Transceiver
3) Local oscillator
4) Branching 1+1
8) DC/DC converter
An additional solar shield can be provided as an option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 136 / 326
326
2.5.5 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar Transceiver physical view
Dimension 268x277x250mm.
1 8
10
9
2
7 3
Tx1
7
6 Tx0
Rx1
6
Rx0
4
2
5 not visible in figure

3
(8BW 00560 0003 BDZZQ)
Fig. 67. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar Transceiver physical view
2) Transceiver
3) Local oscillator
4) Branching 1+1
8) DC/DC converter
An additional solar shield can be provided as option.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 137 / 326
326
2.5.6 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar with XPIC Transceiver physical view

1
(8BW 03059 0001 BDZZQ)
Fig. 68. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar with XPIC Transceiver physical view
1) RF Switch
2) Hybrid
The other parts are as in Fig. 67. on page 137.
N.B. The XPIC option cannot be added in the field, but only in factory or in a specialized maintenance
center.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 138 / 326
326
2.6 UHR/UHRC General Description
2.6.1 Introduction
The ODU Transceiver is designed for outdoor operation; for this purpose, it is accommodated in a metal
housing suitable to withstand atmospheric agents.
The electrical connection between the transceiver and the rest of the system, which is installed indoor, is
established with one 50 ohm coaxial cables.
The outdoor housing can accommodate two transceivers, and specifically two Radio Service Interface
Units, two transmitters, two receivers, and two dual local oscillator units.
The branching circuits comprise branching filters and antenna circulators.
The transceiver equipment is based on the following radio configurations (that are detailed in para.1.5 on
page 81):
a) 1+0 compact , comprising one ODU transceiver. The transmitted RF signal carries one unprotected
baseband signal.
b) 1+0 extendible frequency diversity, comprising one Transceiver housed in the dual transceiver
cabinet. The system can be extended to 1+1 frequency diversity.
c) 1+1 hot–standby (HST), comprising two transceivers operating on the same RF channel. On the
transmit side, one of the two RF channels goes through the antenna circulator to be radio transmitted,
whereas the other operates as standby, via an RF switch. On the receive side, the RF signal is fed
to the two receivers by an RF hybrid. The transmitted RF signal carries the same1 + 1 protected
baseband information.
d) 1+1 frequency diversity, comprising two transceivers operating on two separate radio channels, used
for both the transmit and receive paths. The two transmitted RF signals carry the same 1 + 1 protected
baseband information.
e) 2+0 frequency diversity. The physical composition is the same of point d ) above, but the two
transmitted RF signals carry different baseband information.
f) 1+1 cross–polarized frequencies, comprising two transceivers operating on same radio channels.
The radio channels are transmitted by one cross–polarized antenna. The two transmitted RF signals
carry the same 1 + 1 protected baseband information. In the case of frequency reuse, the
demodulators includes an XPIC circuit (Cross Polar Interference Canceller).
g) 2+0 cross–polarized frequencies. The physical composition is the same as point f ) above, but the
two transmitted RF signals carry different baseband information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 139 / 326
326
The transceiver assembly receives primary power (station battery) through 50 ohm coaxial cables. Each
transceiver contauns a DC/DC converter housed in the Radio Service Interface Unit.
The IDU RRA MODEM unit is based on three subrack configurations:

– Regenerator 1+0 extendible to 1+1.
– Regenerator 1+1
The IDU RRA MODEM operates with an OC-3 input signal, with optical or electrical interface. The use
of an Electrical Protection Switch (EPS) permits operation with a single optical OC-3 input signal.
In addition to the main traffic, the system offers one 2 Mbit/s WST, three service channels at 64 kbit/s, and
one channel at 9600 kbit/s.
In the following, the UHR/UHRC subsystem features are addressed in detail:
– Protection, starting on page 141 and including:
• Signal Protection
• WST protection
• Services protection
– Loop–backs, on page 145
– Frequency Agility, on page 146
– Transmitted power control

The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first under automatic control loop
(ATPC function), the second in a static way. Refer to:
• ATPC function, starting on page 147
• static adjustment, on page 151
– BER Measurements, on page 151
– System Control interfaces, on page 152
– System Service channels, starting on page 153
– Power distribution, starting on page 155
– User interface connectors, on page 157
– LEDs indications, on page 157

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 140 / 326
326
2.6.2 Protection
The general block diagram in the following figure points out the presence of switches that allow different
kinds of protection.
EPSW2a
RRA Mod Tx
TPSW
B
RRA Mod Tx R
E A
P EPSW2b H N
S S C
RPSWa T H
I
RRA Dem Rx N
G
EPSW1
RRA Dem Rx
RPSWb
Fig. 69. Protection switches
The optional block EPS contains the EPSW1 switch that selects the best between the main and the
protecting channel. It is used in the 1+1 frequency diversity configuration where it protects all the IDU
circuits by means of duplication of the RRA/MODEM section.
The optional block HST applies only to the Hot Standby configuration where the TPSW protects against
the failure of the main transmitter module.
The EPSW2 is a pair of switches that protects against the failure of the RRA circuits.
The RPSW is a pair of switches that protects against the failure or degradation of one received signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 141 / 326
326
2.6.2.1 Signal Protection
[1] 1+1 HST configuration

Two different protection mechanisms work on the Tx and Rx sides:

• Transmitter protection.
The RF switch is driven by logic located in the baseband shelf and is activated by the following
alarms:
– Tx alarm priority 1
– modulator alarm priority 1
The Tx alarm is affected by the Tx gain alarm to prevent problems due to TX silent failures (e.g.,
Tx distortion).
• Receiver protection.
With one antenna, receiver protection is driven by local receive side hardware failures only. This
protection is still considered to be RPS. See the following paragraph for a description of the
switching criteria.
The 1+1 HST configuration uses a single OC3/STM1 line interface.

This interface can be:
• unprotected (see Fig. 70. below); in this case the port can be electrical or optical
• or protected (see Fig. 71. below); in this case the port can be only electrical .
RRA T R RRA
FORCED FORCED
SWITCH SWITCH
OC3/ RRA OC3/

RRA T R
STM1 E/O STM1 E/O
Fig. 70. 1+1 HST with unprotected single user interface
RRA T R RRA
E FREE E OC3/
OC3/ P
FREE
P
SWITCH SWITCH
STM1 E S S STM1 E
RRA T RRA
R
Fig. 71. 1+1 HST with protected single user interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 142 / 326
326
[2] 1+1/1:1 Frequency Diversity (FD) configurations
These configurations are characterized by the presence of radio protection switching (RPS) on the
Rx side.
The hitless switch is driven by logic located in the baseband shelf.

The signal fail alarm includes Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch (RCIM) coming from Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH block).
To manage the switch activity in 1:1 FD, the logic needs to exchange information between the Tx side
and Rx side: after a switching need is activated, the Rx side sends to Tx side, via DSI channel, a Tx
parallel command, the same signal on the main channel and the protection channel. The Rx switch
can be performed only after Rx confirmation of Tx parallel data (after Rx alignment confirmation for
EWL and EWH switching criteria).
1+1 FD configuration
In this configuration only one OC3/STM1 line interface is available. This interface can be:
– unprotected (see Fig. 72. below); in this case the port can be electrical or optical
– or protected (see Fig. 73. below); in this case the port can be only electrical .
RRA T R RRA
FORCED FORCED
SWITCH SWITCH OC3/STM1
OC3/STM1
E/O
E/O RRA T RRA
R
Fig. 72. 1+1 FD with unprotected single user interface
RRA T R RRA
OC3/ OC3/
STM1 E E E STM1 E
P FREE FREE P
S SWITCH SWITCH S
RRA T RRA
R
Fig. 73. 1+1FD with protected single user interface
[3] EPS protection
The Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) is performed by a line side switch (Rx protection) and an
intermediate switch within an ASIC (Tx/Rx protection) tracking and processing the following criteria:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– RRA–MD card missing

– RRA–MD 0/1 card fail (MOD card fail+Dem card fail+RRA card fail)
– RRA EPS 0/1 fail (LOS RRA )
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 143 / 326
326
The switches are driven by separate electrical commands to maintain the tracking operation mode, allow
the 1:1 function, and provide unbalanced configurations.
2.6.2.2 Wayside Traffic (WST) protection

It is possible to have WST extra frame protected or unprotected. The selection is made with hardware
and/or software presettings.
The WST extra frame switch, if used, works in 1+1 mode under the following switching criteria :
– Signal Fail alarm priority 1

– HBER alarm “ 2
– EWH alarm “ 3
– EWL alarm “ 4
The signal fail alarm includes RCIM coming from the RFCOH block and the ATL RFCOH remoted.
2.6.2.3 Services protection
The services are always protected in 1+1 radio side while 1+1 protection line side is performed only when
EPS protection is present on the OC-3 signal. In the case of 2+0 configuration the services
insertion/extraction line side can be managed on only one of the two interfaces.
Radio side switch works in 1+1 mode under the following switching criteria :
– Signal Fail alarm priority 1

– HBER alarm “ 2
– EWH alarm “ 3
The signal fail alarm includes RCIM coming from the RFCOH block and ATL RFCOH remoted.
Line side switch works in 1+1 mode under the following switching criteria :
– LOS CK–SYN priority 1

– RRA card fail “ 1
– RRA LOS alarm “ 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 144 / 326
326
2.6.3 Loop–backs
The MDR-9000s systems are provided with loop–back function capabilities at various block diagram
levels. The loop–back function makes fault locations and maintenance tests fast and simple.
The loop–back function activation is obtainable only via ECT.

The MDR system offers four loop–back test types:
– RF Loop–back : this loop–back test inserts a loop circuit in the ODU unit at RF level; the loop activates
a connection between the transmitter and the receiver.
– RST Loop–back line side: this loop–back test inserts a loop circuit in the IDU unit after the input
interface and before the RST processing circuit.
– RFCOH Loop–back: this loop–back test inserts a loop circuit in the IDU unit at the output of baseband
circuits and before the modem circuit.
– Remote RST Loop–back radio side: this loop–back test inserts a loop circuit in the remote IDU unit
after the RST processing circuit. The local and remote transceivers are included in this test operation
and only the remote IDU OC-3 interface is loop–back excluded.
Loop–back testing allowsf execution of some system functional tests, e.g., the BER test using a pattern
generator connected to the IDU OC-3 input / output ports.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 145 / 326
326
2.6.4 Frequency Agility
The frequency agility feature allows, within a chosen sub–band, selection of the RF working channel. The
selection can be performed directly in field with benefits of spare parts, order processing, and frequency

coordination.

The two types of frequency agility are:
Local frequency agility - the capability to, set via ECT, the frequency of a single transceiver.
Local–remote frequency agility - the capability to change, contemporaneously, by means of a

proper procedure the frequency of the transceivers of one hop which are already installed and
working. This feature is called RFC (Remote Frequency Control).
The frequency agility feature basically consists of:
– Availability of Wide Band RF filters covering 1/4 or 1/8 of the applicable channelling (go and return).
– Synthesized local oscillator covering 1/4 or 1/8 of the applicable channelling (go and return).
– Pre–setting of above local oscillator performed by local ECT.
Frequency agility is supported for the bands 13,15,18,23,25,28,38 GHz but not supported for the bands
6L,6U,7,8,11 GHz.
The feature is available for the configurations 1+0 Compact, 1+0 EXP/2+0/1+1 FD AP, 1+1 HST, 1+1
frequency reuse but is not available in 1+1 FD CP (see also para 1.5 on page 81).
The main restriction of the frequency agility feature in 1+1/2+0 Alternate Polar configurations mentioned
above, is related to the fact that the two RF channels have to belong to the same RF Wide Band Filter range
(otherwise Narrow Band Filters are necessary and as a consequence the frequency agility is lost).
Fig. 74. below, referred to the 18 GHz channel arrangement with the relevant Wide–Band filters/Local
Oscillators ranges, illustrates the restriction with a simple example .
CH1 CH2 CH1’ CH2’

W.B.FILTER W.B.FILTER W.B.FILTER W.B.FILTER
O.L.1 O.L.2 O.L.3 O.L.4 O.L.1’ O.L.2’ O.L.3’ O.L.4’
OK OK
OK NO
Fig. 74. Frequency agility restriction (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 146 / 326
326
2.6.5 Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC)
The ATPC function allows regulation of the transmitted power in order to supply reduced power in
situations of normal propagation and maximum power in conditions of fading.
Working principle
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a transmitter and a receiver
connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 75. below, the receiver furnishes, through the AGC voltage, the information of the
received power to the ATPC controller. The controller compares the voltage with threshold values
(presettable) and according to the obtained result, sends an increase/ decrease of transmitted power
command toward the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link. The command is processed and
transferred to the associated transmitter.
STATION A STATION B
PRX RX
IF IF
MOD DEM
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC AGC
CONTROL
RFCOH RFCOH
EXTRACT INSERT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA ATPC DATA
PRX PTX
DEM IF RX TX IF MOD
N.B. ATPC Regulation is shown in one transmission direction only and is valid for each channel
Fig. 75. ATPC Functionality
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing
service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding changes to the standard SOH bytes).
In the protected configurations this informationis transmitted 1+1 protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 147 / 326
326
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be summed–up in the following (for each channel):
– received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move
the Tx output power).

– Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
– ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 east–west configuration)
This information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx
and ID_ch information is transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the
PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided whether to send up or down
or hold commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of
frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application). The failure of “Rx0 and Rx1” received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the two
transmitters in case of 1+1HST frequency reuse configuration or to set them at low Pout in case of 1+1HST
standard configuration (no frequency reuse application). Transmitter(s) are switched on after Rx failure
removal. The Rx failure alarm is not controlled by propagation alarms.
The service channel mentioned above is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each
RRA/Modemodulator.
An example is shown in the following Fig. 76.
Fig. 76. Typical ATPC threshold

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 148 / 326
326
Organization of the control system
The ATPC control system replies for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
– the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection, and insertion of
the above data in RFCOH bytes
– the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
ATPC Threshold management
The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range LM (max level) and Lm (min level). The
transceiver has its own default value for LM, Lm, and LN (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
LMA (max level ATPC) where LMA <= LM
LmA (min level ATPC) where LmA >= Lm
with the constraint: Lm<=LmA<=LN

Lm<=LMA<=LM
This means that:
– the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for LMA and LmA
– the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called “EXTRA
POWER threshold” depending on the signal (STM1 or OC3) and on the modulation used (128QAM, 32
QAM, or 16QAM):
+5dB from threshold 10E–3.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation, within the following
limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from ( –40 dBm ) to ( – EXTRA POWER threshold dBm )
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold, the transmitter increases the
output power up to the nominal value. When the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER
threshold, the transmitter increases the output power reducing its back–off (if LMA>LN only). The
hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is the minimum level in 10ms time intervals.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an
ATPC loop alarm is activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the ATPC
loop alarm is deactivated after a histeresis is defined.
It is possible to enable or disable ATPC function:
– when the ATPC is set in manual condition via ECT the output power can be changed starting from
the output power value at the moment of the manual operation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– when the ATPC is set in automatic condition the output power changes automatically if the ATPC loop
is closed, otherwise the output power remains at the value set in manual mode if the ATPC loop is
open.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 149 / 326
326
Via ECT it is possible to manually set the output power in the range LM ÷ Lm. This setting must be
considered a temporary setting and a manual (abnormal) indication is activated. By portable service unit
and in factory only, it is possible to set the output power manually in the range:

LMC (max calibrated level) ÷ Lmc (min calibrated level)

Every power change, from manual to automatic and vice-versa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
To be sure that a decrease of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increase of the relevant Tx
at a remote station an “identifier station code” must be used. The same “identifier station code” should be
set on the two stations involved in the ATPC function. This ensures that in crosstalk/interference or RFCOH
bypass in a repeater the Tx at one station cannot be driven by a non-relevant Rx.
ATPC in HST configuration
The transmitters are driven by the lower PRx of the two receivers according to the following logic flow chart:
Y N
Switchoff TX0 and TX1 RX0 and RX1 failed Switchon TX0 and TX1
Y
RX1 failed
N
N
Y
RX1 failed
Y N
PRX0 < PRX1
N Y
PRX1 < PRX0
Y
N
PRX1 >–30dBm
Y
PRX0 < extra PW
threshold
Y N
N PRX0 >–30dBm
Y
PRX1 < extra PW N
threshold
TX hold TX hold
PRX0drivesTX PRX1drivesTX
Fig. 77. ATPC in HST configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 150 / 326
326
2.6.6 Transmitted power control: static adjustment
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which due to the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible
attenuation depends on the frequency band involved. The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy
of ± 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally by means of ECT.
2.6.7 Bit Error Rate (BER) Measurements
The following types of BER Measurement are possible:
[1] Intrusive BER Measurements
The feature is obtained by means of a procedure based on Direct VI Manager and external measurement
instruments.
This feature is useful during the installation phase (out of service condition of the hop) and allows
automatic detection of the bit error rate curve versus received power without the use of external
instruments.
The procedure, activated on the selected channel by the operator, provides that the remote transmitter
decrease output power to reach BER=10E–7 and then to 10E–6, 10E–5 and 10E–4; in corresponence to
these values of BER the related received power wil be reported.
At the end of this procedure the remote transmitter returns to its standard working mode.
Required attenuation is provided partially in the RF section (–5dBm = minimum PTx for this application
that means ) and partially in the IF=420MHz section (additional 40dB).
[2] Non-Intrusive BER Measurements
This feature provides a radio side BER evaluation by means of B1 mismatch computation externally to
the radio switching section without any degradation of the signal.
The evaluation is provided on a one second base if the B1 mismatches detected are a to be determined
(TBD) threshold, otherwise a time window is opened to count B1 mismatches up to TBD threshold
minimum value required to provide a good estimation of BER; at this time the window is closed, the BER
is shown, and another window is opened.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 151 / 326
326
2.6.8 System Control interfaces
The MDR-9000s Regenerator system provides the following system control interfaces:

– I/O for TMN (QB3) on S.A.M unit (BNC connector 10BASE2 and RJ45 10BASE-T).

– Craft terminal interface (F) on S.A.M unit
The interface cable provided is standard cable assembled with RS232 9-Pin female (serial interface
PC side) and a RS232 9-Pin MALE (SAM side).
– SC access on RRA/modem unit

The interface cable is assembled with RS232 9-Pin female (PC side) and RJ45 connector
(RRA/MOD side) see Tab. 25.
All the user interface connectors can be accessed on the RRA Regenerator unit front panel.
The special cables needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system are supplied with the
equipment.
Tab. 25. Connection table
PAIR WIRE RS232 RJ45 COLOR
1 A Not used Not used White / Blue ring
1 B Not used Not used Blue
2 A 5 4 White / Orange ring
2 B Not used Not used Orange
3 A 3 8 White / Green ring
3 B 2 7 Green
4 A Not used Not used White / Brown ring
4 B Not used Not used Brown

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 152 / 326
326
2.6.9 System Service channels
The MDR-9000s Regenerator radio provides the following service channel availability:
2.6.9.1 WST 2Mbit/s

– The I/O standard interface provided for WST 2Mbit/s traffic is according to Rec. G703:
• The 2Mbit/s stream can be used as protected or unprotected traffic.
– Interface signal:
• HDB3 code
• 75 ohm unbalanced
• Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75–ohm
– UHR system capacity:

• Maximum 2x2Mbit/s WST unprotected mode
• Maximum 1x2 Mbit/s WST protected mode
– UHRC system capacity:

• Maximum 1x2 Mbit/s WST unprotected mode
2.6.9.2 Auxliary services channels
– SAM unit provides external access for auxiliary service channels (SCSI 26-pin female connector).
See Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. Auxiliary service channels
inserted/
N. bit/s Format Connect. wires Note
extracted
asynchronous SCSI
1 9600 RSOH/RFCOH 2
V24/V28) 26-PINS
SCSI
2 64k G703 RSOH/RFCOH 8
26-PINS
SCSI
1 64k V11 RSOH/RFCOH 8
26-PINS
Voice
1 telephony RSOH/RFCOH RJ11 2 EOW
frequency
Voice SCSI
2 I/O –3dBm RSOH/RFCOH 8 Party line
frequency 26-PINS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 153 / 326
326
2.6.9.3 EOW Channel
The user can implement two call modes:

– selective activates a two-way speech link between two users

– omnibus activates a one-way link with all users
The User Number, within a 10 to 99 range, is software programmable; for omnibus mode, dial 00.
Front LED indications:
– GREEN: free line
– YELLOW: engaged line
– YELLOW flashing: call received and acknowledged
Keys on telephone handset:
* : forced line release # : line seizure
SCSI Connector makes two Party-Line (A and B) paths available.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 154 / 326
326
2.6.10 Power distribution
Power supply connections are provided through 2x3–pin sub–D connectors on Power Supply Unit front
panel. The interconnections pins are indicated in para.2.4.10 on page 130.
The 1+1 IDU UHRC power distribution block diagram is shown in Fig. 78.
– 48/60 v .
OR battery 1 and 2
+ Battery 1
+5.2v
GND RRA
–Battery1
+3.4v MODEM
Power MODEM
– 5.2V
+ Battery 2 Supply
GND
–48/60 V
–Battery2
RRA E/O
INTERFACE
Fail Battery Fail Battery
S.A.M. ESCON
Fig. 78. UHRC IDU Power distribution
The 1+1 IDU UHR power distribution block diagram is shown in Fig. 79.
– 48/60 v .
OR battery 1 and 2
RRA EPS
+ Battery 1
GND
+5.2v
–Battery1 RRA
Power MODEM 0
+3.4v
+ Battery 2 Supply 0 MODEM XPIC
– 5.2V
GND
–48/60 V
– Battery 2
E/O
RRA
Fail Battery Fail Battery INTERFACE
+5v
S.A.M. ESCON
–5v
E/O
RRA
INTERFACE
+ Battery 1
GND +5.2v
–Battery1
Power +3.4v RRA
MODEM XPIC
+ Battery 2 Supply 1 – 5.2V MODEM 1
GND
–48/60 V
–Battery2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– 48/60 v . FANS UNIT

Fail Battery Fail Battery
OR battery 1 and 2
Fig. 79. UHR IDU Power distribution
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 155 / 326
326
The ODU power distribution scheme is summarized in the drawing below, Fig. 80.

_
Service 3,3/5/6/–12 Volt
LO
48/60 V
3,3/6/–12 Volt
IF Tx
5/6/–5 Volt
RF Tx
48/60 V –12/+6 V 12 V
RF
switch
3,3/6/–12 Volt
IF Rx
DC/DC Converter
RF
switch
5/–5 Volt
RF Rx
Fig. 80. ODU Power distribution

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 156 / 326
326
2.6.11 User interface connectors
a) Service channels on SCSI 26-pin connector

See connector front view and pinout in Fig. 56. on page 122 and Tab. 19. on page 125.
b) Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40-pin connector

See connector front view and pinout in Fig. 56. on page 122 and Tab. 18. on page 124.
c) Station Alarms
See connector front view and pinout in para.2.4.11 on page 131.
2.6.12 LEDs indications
The table defines the LEDs in the MDR-9000s IDU.
Tab. 27. LED colour and meaning
Unit Function Led colour Mnemonic

PSU PSU switch ON Green
See par. 2.7.9 on PSU switch OFF (Psu alarm) Light off
page 177 is active
RRA /MODEM RRA/MODEM fail Red
See par. 2.7.3 on
page 165 RT fail Red
SAM SAM card fail Red C.F.SAM

See par. 2.7.5 on EOW line busy Yellow
page 169
EOW line free Green
OR of all Major alarms Red MAJOR
OR of all Minor alarms Red MINOR
OR of all Warning alarms Yellow WARNING
OR of all abnormal conditions Yellow ABN
Attended alarm Yellow ATTD
For alarms details and actions to be taken refer to related documents, Operator handbook, and Alarm
Surveillance.
RRA/MODEM fail, RT fail, and SAM card fail are hardware alarms and imply the need for card substitution.
The EOW LEDs are hardwired and indicate that the EOW is free or engaged. The behavior of the other
LEDs depends on the alarm profile set with the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 157 / 326
326
2.7 UHR/UHRC–IDU Units Description
2.7.1 Introduction

The IDU Regenerator unit is based on two subrack types:
– Regenerator 1+0 extendible and regenerator 1+1
The baseband terminal regenerator RRA/MODEM is developed to support transceivers from the 15 GHz
to 38 GHz frequency range.
The IDU Regenerator unit includes two main circuit functions, the RRA/MODEM and the SAM (Service
and Management).
The RRA/MODEM functions are:
– Bi–directional RRA processing;

– Drop–insert of RSOH overhead bytes;
– Drop–insert of RFCOH overhead bytes;
– RPS protection;
– Modulation and Demodulation;
– XPIC canceller (1+1 Regenerator with frequency reuse).
The SAM functions are:
– Service channels management;

– Switching logic control;
– I/O WST traffic management;
– System controller;
– Mux/demux of data communication IDU/ODU.
The UHR/UHRC hardware description is given according to the following information organization:
– Hardware composition and block–diagrams of the various configurations, starting on page 159 and
including:
• IDU Regenerator 1+0 compact
• Regenerator 1+1
• Regenerator 2+0
• Regenerator 1+0 EAST WEST and WMSN–TS
– RRA/MODEM, starting on page 165
– Auxiliary service & management (SAM), starting on page 169
– RRA EPS (electrical interface), starting on page 175
– Fans Unit, starting on page 176
– Power Supply Units, starting on page 177

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 158 / 326
326
2.7.2 Hardware composition and block–diagrams of the various configurations
2.7.2.1 IDU Regenerator 1+0 compact

The 1+0 configuration is equipped with the following units:

– Power supply unit

– RRA/MODEM 128 QAM (or RRA/MODEM 16 or 32 QAM) and AUX Service & Management unit
– Lamps connection unit
– Optical OC-3 or electrical interface.
The 1+0 Regenerator system is configured as a terminal radio with OC-3 optical or electrical interfaces
or as a terminal multiplex adding a MUX subrack.
The subrack can be inserted in a standard 19” rack, placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
The 1+0 UHRC Regenerator block diagram is shown in Fig. 81. on page 159 and Fig. 82. on page 159.
Ktx
RRA/MODEM 1
STM1
Op.
RST RFCOH
or El. MOD IF 1
DCCR 5.1Mb
2Mb/s
5.1Mb
F
S DCCR EOW
QB3
C Aux Channels
. 64 Kb
PIO
5.1Mb
2Mb/s)
MC,ATPC,DSI
S.A.M
Fig. 81. UHRC 1+0 configuration Tx side (electrical/optical interface)
Kr
RRA/MODEM 1
IF STM1
DEM RFCOH RST Op or El
DCCR
5.1Mb 5.1Mb 2Mb/s
F
EOW
SC
QB3
64Kb Aux. channels
DCCR PIO 2Mb/s
MC,ATPC,DSI
DCCR
5.1Mb
S.A.M.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 82. UHRC 1+0 configuration Rx side (electrical/optical interface)
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 159 / 326
326
2.7.2.2 Regenerator 1+1
The 1+1 HST/FD or cross–polarization configurations are equipped with the following:

– 2 Power supply units;

– 2 RRA/MODEM 128 QAM, 32 QAM, or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM units (without Optical or Electrical
Interface) (1+1 hitless switching function active for 1+1, 1:1 system);
– 1 AUX Service & Management unit;
– 1 EPS 1+1 elect. switching;
– 1 Lamps connection unit or FAN unit (the FAN unit is used only for 128 QAM with XPIC).
The 1+1 UHR Regenerator block diagrams are shown in Fig. 83. on page 161 and Fig. 84. on page 161.
The 1+1 system is configured as a terminal radio with OC-3 optical or electrical interfaces or as a terminal
multiplex adding a MUX subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 160 / 326
326
Ktx
RRA/MODEM 1
RST RFCOH MOD

IF 1
DCCR 5.1 Mb
2Mb/s
5.1 Mb
STM1 F
EPS SC DCCR EOW

QB3 SERVICE
64 Kb
PIO
5.1 Mb 2Mb/s)
DSI,MC,ATPC
S.A.M.
DCCR
2Mb/s
5.1 Mb
RST RFCOH MOD IF 0
RRA/MODEM 0
Ktx
Fig. 83. UHR 1+1 configuration Tx side (electrical interface)
Kr
RRA/MODEM 1
IF
DEM RFCOH RST
5.1 Mb DCCR
5.1 Mb
F 2Mb/s
STM1
EOW SC
QB3
64 Kb SERVICE
DCCR PIO
2Mb/s
RRA–EPS
DSI,MC,ATPC S.A.M.
5.1 Mb DCCR
5.1 Mb
2Mb/s
IF
DEM RFCOH RST
RRA/MODEM 0
Kr
Fig. 84. UHR 1+1 configuration Rx side (electrical interface)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 161 / 326
326
2.7.2.3 Regenerator 2+0
The 2+0 FD configurations are equipped with the following:


– 2 RRA/MODEM 128 QAM, RRA/MODEM 32 QAM, or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM units (1+1 hitless
switching function active for 1:1 system);
– 2 Electrical and Optical Interfaces;
– 1 Lamps connection unit.
The 2+0 UHR Regenerator block diagrams are shown in Fig. 85. on page 163 and Fig. 86. on page 163.
The 2+0 system is configured as a terminal radio with OC-3 optical or electrical interfaces or as a terminal
multiplex adding a MUX subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 162 / 326
326
Ktx
RRA/MODEM 1
STM1
Op or El RST RFCOH MOD
IF 1
DCCR 5.1 Mb
2Mb/s
5.1Mb
F
SC DCCR EOW
QB3 SERVICE
64 Kb
PIO
5.1Mb 2Mb/s)
DSI,MC,ATPC
S.A.M.
DCCR 2Mb/s
5.1 Mb
STM1
Op or El RST RFCOH MOD IF 0
RRA/MODEM 0
Ktx
Fig. 85. UHR 2+0 configuration Tx side (electrical/optical interface)
Kr
RRA/MODEM 1
IF STM1
DEM RFCOH RST Op orEl
5.1Mb DCCR
5.1Mb
F 2Mb/s
EOW SC
QB3
64Kb SERVICE 2Mb/s
DCCR PIO
DSI,MC,ATPC S.A.M.
5.1Mb DCCR
5.1Mb
2Mb/s
IF
DEM RFCOH RST Op or El STM1
RRA/MODEM 0
Kr
Fig. 86. UHR 2+0 configuration Rx side (electrical/optical interface)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 163 / 326
326
2.7.2.4 Regenerator 1+0 EAST WEST and WMSN–TS
The 1+0 EAST WEST configurations are equipped with the following:


– 2 RRA/MODEM 128 QAM, RRA/MODEM 32 QAM, or RRA/MODEM 16 QAM units (1+1 hitless
switching function not active)
– 2 Electrical and Optical Interfaces;
– 1 Lamps connection unit.
The 1+0 EAST WEST system is configured as a terminal radio with OC-3 optical or electrical interfaces
or as a terminal multiplex adding a MUX subrack. Fig. 87. on page 164 and Fig. 88. on page 164.
This subrack can be inserted in a standard 19” rack, placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
MUX INSERTION
Ktx
RRA/MODEM 0 RRA/MODEM 1 Ktx
IF0 IF1
MOD RFCOH RST El El RST RFCOH MOD EAST
WEST
STM1 STM1
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb DCCR DCCR
5.1 Mb 64 Kb
5.1 Mb
EOW DCCR WEST F DCCR EAST SERVICE
64 Kb SERVICE DSI,MC,
DSI,MC, SC ATPC
PIO
ATPC QB3
E/W PARTY LINE CONNECTION S.A.M.
Fig. 87. WMSN–TS configuration Tx side
MUX DROP
RRA/MODEM 0 Kr RRA/MODEM 1 Kr
From
IF EAST
DEM RFCOH APSE RST El El RST APSE RFCOH DEM
From STM1
IF WEST
5.1 Mb DCCR 5.1 Mb DCCR DCCR 5.1 Mb
64 Kb
EOW
DCCR WEST DCCR EAST 5.1 Mb SERVICE
SC DSI,MC,ATPC
SERVICE
64 Kb
E/W PARTY LINE CONNECTION
DSI,MC,ATPC
S.A.M.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 88. WMSN–TS configuration Rx side
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 164 / 326
326
2.7.3 RRA/MODEM
See Fig. 81. on page 159 to Fig. 88. on page 164.

[1] Types and functions

RRA/MODEM is available in three different types:
– 128 QAM STM1+1WST;
– 32 QAM STM1+1WST;
– 16 QAM STM1+1WST.
The RRA/MODEM board performs the following main functions:
– Extraction /Insertion RSOH line side to/ from Service Board;
– Hitless Switch (for 1+1 operation);
– Extraction/insertion RFCOH radio side to/from Service Board;
– Modem QAM;
– Radio cable interface;
– Cross-polar interference canceller with additional XPIC circuit.
The RRA–MODEM unit is provided with a plug–in type module for the OC-3 signal input/output function.
Two types of interface modules are available: electrical or optical.
The OC-3 Tx and Rx signals are processed by the RST circuit (Regenerator Section Termination) which
executes various operations on the RSOH section bytes of the OC-3 signal.
The next circuit protects the 1+1 mode by splitting the signal onto two paths, i.e., for the Tx side, while on
the Rx side it executes a hitless switching operation.
The function of the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) circuit located on the Tx side is to
insert the radio side regeneration overhead bytes.
The reciprocal function is carried out on the Rx side by the RFCOH circuit.
The unit can also house the 16 QAM, 32 QAM, or 128 QAM type modulator and demodulator circuits.
The 16 QAM and 32 QAM modems utilize a baseband error corrector, while the 128 QAM modem
implements the Trellis type corrector and has a Viterbi algorithm demodulator.
The 420 MHz IF signal exits the modulator, while the 1080 MHz frequency signal enters the demodulator.
The demodulator implemented in the 1+1 configured systems with RF re–use is also provided with a cross-
polarized interference canceller (XPIC).
The 1+1 configured systems are provided with an operative RPS hitless protection function positioned
between RST and RFCOH circuits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The relative switching criteria are reported in Tab. 28. on page 170.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 165 / 326
326
[2] Front panels
The RRA/MODEM board is used in the UHR and UHRC system with three different front panels:

– Front panel KIT for UHR system;

– Front panel KIT for UHR system with XPIC;
– Front panel KIT for UHRC system.
The physical dimensions are : width 318 mm/12.5 in, depth 220mm/8.7 in , height 30 mm/1.2 in.
Fig. 59. on page 129 shows the board with front panel kit UHR with XPIC.
The following interfaces are available on the front panel:
– IF In/Out cable (Connector N = 50 Ohm) towards lightning discharge;
– Input/output OC-3 optical or electrical;
– IF input for XPIC (the connector is not available when XPIC is not used);
– IF output for XPIC (this output can be used as an IF monitoring point when XPIC is not used).
Two red LEDs also present indicate:
– RT fail;
– Regenerator fail.
[3] IDU/ODU Cable interface
The RRA/MODEM board contains the cable interfacing circuits, see Fig. 89. on page 167.
The radio interface receives / transmits the signals from/to the outdoor unit via the IF cable.
Main functions are: cable interfaces, lightning protection, and signal combiner/splitter.
The connection between ODU and IDU is a coaxial cable with N type 50-Ohm connectors,
The primary lightning protection is external to the IDU unit.
The following signals are present on the same coaxial cable interface: IF TX (420 MHz), IF RX (1080 MHz),
1024 Kbit service signal operating bi-directionally, and DC voltage.
The signals are distributed over four filtered paths where each filter selects the desired signals.
Secondary lightning protection is provided by suppressor diodes and acts additional protection for the
outdoor unit against lightning discharges.
The diodes are installed as close as possible to the input/output connectors.
To receive/ transmit data information and speech from/to the ODU, two serial data streams are used. A
1024 Kbit/s and an HDB3 coded bi–directional signal are present on the same cable. These signals are
converted into NRZ and CK codes for processing in the SAM unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 166 / 326
326
IDU
BATTERY
HDB3
RZ
TO/FROM
SERVICES
RZ
HDB3
CABLE +
420 MHz
IF Tx
1080 MHz
IF Rx
Fig. 89. IDU/ODU Cable interface
2.7.4 XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations
Frequency Reuse technology allows doubling frequency plan transmission capacity and permit the
co–existence of two STM1/OC3 signals on a single radio link.
This co–channel system is seriously affected by co–frequency cross–polarized interference arising from
low XPD values that may occur during periods of multi–path fading.
The XPIC is a set of devices able to make negligible the mutual interference of two signals travelling over
the same carrier frequency, but on opposite polarization.
Fig. 90. on page 168 shows a simplified block diagram of the XPIC kit and of its working principle.
XPIC kit composition
The XPIC kit includes:
– a kit for ODU assembly, having the function of synchronizing the local oscillators of the receivers (see
Fig. 68. on page 138);
– a kit to be installed on both the RRA/MODEM units of the IDU–UHR assembly (see Fig. 50. on page
115).
The XPIC kit requires:
– that the two IDU–ODU IF cables have the same lenght

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– the cross connection between the XPIC Input–Output sockets of the two RRA/MODEM units of the
IDU–UHR assembly (see an example in Fig. 131. on page 208).
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 167 / 326
326
IDU RRA/MODEM H

XPIC

BOARD
A
MOD H RX H IF DEM H D
TX H
XPIC
LO OUT XPIC
IN
B
H
ODU
XPIC
KIT
V
C
LO XPIC
IF XPIC IN
MOD H TX V RX V OUT
DEM V
XPIC
BOARD
IDU RRA/MODEM V
ODU
TX SIDE RX SIDE
Fig. 90. XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations
XPIC working principle (Fig. 90. )
Tthe following describes the signal processing operation on the H Rx section. The operation on V Rx
section is analogous.
In points (A) and (B) the H signal is affected by V signal interference. At point (C) the V signal is sent to
H Rx section (DEM H + XPIC board) which, through suitable processing, forwards toward the subsequent
RRA/MODEM base–band block (point (D) ) the H signal without the V interference signal.
The processing operated by DEM H + XPIC board in more detail is as follows (not shown in figure):
– the IF signal is base–band converted, filtered, and sampled by A/D converters at 2/T frequency
– samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by
means of 1/T frequency clock signal
– XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from an internal equalizer and its central coefficient
is left spare for phase error recovering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– XPIC output signal is sent to the internal equalizer way adder

– XPIC way ASIC receives algotithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer
way ASIC.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 168 / 326
326
2.7.5 Auxiliary service & management (SAM)
See Fig. 81. on page 159 to Fig. 88. on page 164.

The auxiliary service board performs the following main functions:

– Management of RSOH/RFCOH bytes;

– I/O service channels and system telephone services;
– Management of DSI,ATPC,MC bytes;
– Switch control logic for 1+1,HST;
– Switch control logic for EPS protection in 1+1 System;
– I/O 2 Mbit/s WST channel;
– Switch and SW logic for 2 Mbit/s WST signal;
– System controller( by baby board ESCON);
– Remote and Housekeeping alarms management;
– Power supply ANDOR function;
– Digital Communication Channel (DCCR) management;
– Multiplexing and demultiplexing of data communication channel for IDU/ODU information swapping.
The SAM board is used in the UHR and UHRC system with two different front panels:
– RRA/MODEM SERV. Front panel kit for UHRC system.
– SERVICE. Front panel kit for UHR system.
[1] Front panel
Fig. 56. on page 122 shows the SERVICE board front panel for UHR.
The physical dimensions are: width 318 mm/12.5 in, depth 220mm/8.7 in, and height 25 mm/.99 in.
The following interfaces are available on the front panel:

– Input/output Service Channel (26-pin SCSI);
– Input /Output 2 Mbit WST (75 ohm unbalanced);
– EOW RJ11;
– Alarm, house keeping, and Prx analog measure (40-pin SCSI);
– QB3 (10base2) BNC and 10Base-T RJ45;
– F (RS232 –canon 9-pin).
Eight LEDs on the left of the unit indicate:

– C.F. SAM card Fail or service fail and SC fail;
– EOW line busy;
– EOW line free;
– MAJOR;
– MINOR;
– IND (Indicative);
– ATTD (Attended);
– ABN (Abnormal).
The ABN led indicates that a special operation has been performed through CT (for instance a loopback).
The IND led shows that the equipment is working in a particular state (for instance in protection mode).
The ATTD led lights on after alarms memorization and lights off when the normal condition resumes.
Fig. 57. on page 123 shows the front panel LEDs position and color.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Three push buttons are available on the unit and are used for Lamp test, Alarm cut off, and reset.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 169 / 326
326
[2] System controller
The mother board SAM includes a baby board as system controller.

The system controller performs the following main functions:

– Equipment controller
– Radio controller
– DCCR management
– Remote Inventory management
– Station alarms
– Summarizing alarms
– Housekeeping
The following tables show the various switching alarms criteria.
The RPS switching criteria are shown in Tab. 28.

All these alarms are duplicated for Regenerator 0 and Regenerator 1
Tab. 28. RPS switching alarms criteria
SWITCH CRITERIA MEANING

DEM card fail
DEM fail Function DEM fault
RRA/MODEM missing Unit modem missing
RRA card fail
MOD card fail
HBER High BER is activated by BER 10–5 – 10–3
LBER Low BER is activated by BER in the range 10–8 – 10–6
EW Early Warning is activated by BER in the range 10–11 –10–9
The RSOH switching criteria are shown in Tab. 29.

This software logic is active only in 1+1 configurations
All these alarms are duplicated for Regenerator 0 and Regenerator 1
Tab. 29. RSOH switching alarms criteria

Regenerator Card Fail
Los RRA Loss of signal NRZ input RRA
MIRL Internal clock loss
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 170 / 326
326
The RFCOH switching criteria are shown in Tab. 30.
This software logic is active in all configurations except 1+0 E/W.
All these alarm are duplicated for Regenerator 0 and Regenerator 1
Tab. 30. RFCOH switching alarms criteria


DEM card fail
DEM fail Function DEM fault
Regenerator missing Unit modem missing
ATL Internal clock loss
RRA card fail RRA/Modem to replace
MIRR Internal clock loss
HBER High BER is activated by BER 10–5 – 10–3
EW Early Warning is activated by BER in the range 10–11 –10–9
[3] Optical/Electrical interfaces
The unit is a plug–in type, inserted on the RRA/MODEM board, it performs the OC-3 optical/electrical
bi–directional interface.
The physical dimensions are width 80mm/3.2 in, depth 80 mm/3.2 in, and height 15 mm/0.6 in.
The Input/Output OC-3 signal with optical or electrical connector is accessed on the unit front panel.
– Electrical bi–directional interface
– Optical bi–directional interface
[4] 2Mbit Way Side Traffic
The processing circuit 2Mbit/s WST is present on the SAM board.
At the input the 2 Mbit/s HDB3 WST signal is converted in the NRZ signal, and is split into two 2 Mbit/s
digital streams.
One 2 Mbit/s stream is inserted/ extracted to/from the RRA/Modem board “0” and another to/from the
Regenerator board “1” . On the RX side a switch selects the better of the two signals.
The WST protection function can be excluded.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 171 / 326
326
Electrical Bi-Directional Interface
The electrical module (Fig. 91. ) can be housed in the STM–1 units, implementing the line interface for the
electrical STM1 (155.522 Mb/s).

Up to two modules can be housed in each card.

The module contains :
– a CMI interface (CMI/NRZ decoder and NRZ/CMI encoder)

– the clock recovery circuit
– a Remote Inventory
CMI interface
RX side : the CMI electrical signal STM1 at 155.52 Mb/s coming from the line is NRZ decoded (clock +
data). The LOS alarm is revealed.
TX side : the NRZ signal coming from the port (data + clock) is CMI coded to be sent to the line .
Remote inventory
The Remote inventory is stored on a EEPROM. Inventory data such as code, serial number, construction
date are stored inside the EEPROM and can be read through the RIBUS–I/F.
LOS
RX side DATA RX
Coax Input CMI/NRZ
DECODER CLOCK RX
TX side DATA TX
Coax output
NRZ/CMI
CLOCK TX
ENCODER
Remote Rinv TO RIBUS–I/F

Inventory
ELECTRICAL MODULE
Fig. 91. STM1 electrical module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 172 / 326
326
Optical Bi-Directional Interface
The OC-3 optical module (Fig. 92. ) is the optical physical interface for the OC-3 cards. Different types
are available according to the connector type, fiber, and optical power range.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALS–restart push–button.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52Mb/s OC3 optical signal into electrical, recovers the clock,
and detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the laser–failure
and laser–degrade alarms, receives the laser–shutdown command from the controller, and the
ALS–restart command from a front push–button.
OPTICAL EDR
INPUT DATA RX
Rx Opt. Module Level
ECKR Adapter CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT DATA TX
ECT Level
OPTICAL Adapter CLOCK TX
OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALS–Restart o
o
Remote TO RIBUS–I/F
GND Inventory Rinv
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 92. OC-3 optical module – block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 173 / 326
326
2.7.6 STM–1 Electrical and OC-3 Optical Modules Views

INPUT
OUTPUT
Fig. 93. View of STM–1 electrical module
INPUT INPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
ALS restart key ALS restart key
SC/PC FC/PC
Fig. 94. View of OC-3 optical module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 174 / 326
326
2.7.7 RRA EPS ( Electrical Interface)
This unit is used only for 1+1 configuration.

Fig. 60. on page 130 shows the access input /output signals to the EPS switch.
The subunit EPS protection implements a two–way user interface.
In the transmission section the sub-unit receives a G703 CMI signal and splits it into two signals towards
the two Regenerator units.
In the receiver section the sub-unit receives two NRZ signals from Regenerator “0” and Regenerator “1”
and selects the best signal between them.
The Fig. 95. on page 175 shows the EPS block diagram.
RRA EPS
Los INP STM1

Input
only 1+1
Data + Ck
TO RRA/MODEM 0
Cable equalizer
and CMI/NRZ Data + Ck
STM 1 TO RRA/ MODEM 1
From SAM
Kcmi
Output
DATA
only 1+1 FROM RRA/MODEM 0
NRZ/CMI MUX CK
FROM RRA/MODEM 1 Remote SPI
STM 1
inventory
Card Missing
To SAM
RRA EPS FAIL
Fig. 95. RRA –EPS block diagram
The physical dimensions are: width 18 mm/0.7 in, depth 220mm/8.7 in, height 28 mm/1.1 in.
The EPS switching criteria are shown in Tab. 31.

When a LOF or TIM alarm is active the EPS logic is inhibited
Tab. 31. EPS switching alarms criteria

RRA /Modem 0 Card Fail Regenerator failure
RRA /Modem 1 Card Fail Regenerator failure
Los RRA 0 Loss of signal NRZ input RRA0
Los RRA 1 Loss of signal NRZ input RRA1
RRA/MODEM 0 missing Unit modem missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RRA/MODEM 1 missing Unit modem missing

K_EPSW1 EPS Switch command, RX side
K_EPSW2 EPS Switch command, TX side
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 175 / 326
326
2.7.8 Fans Unit
This unit is used for UHR assembly with XPIC and is equal to that used in UHM/UHMC subsystem.

In order to obtain high reliability three fans have been used with separate alarms.

The following hardware priority alarm levels are given:
– two fans not working MAJOR alarm
– one fan not working MINOR alarm
N.B. From the software point of view, there is no discrimination between fan’s MAJOR and MINOR
alarms.
Fig. 96. below shows the unit block diagram.
Pins on front panel Station Alarms connector are connected, via the backpanel, with the R/M interface of
the SAM board (see page 170).
Refer to para.2.4.11 on page 131 for connector pinout.
Lamp group connections
Loss –5V
Fan Al. 1
transition fan 1
Al.
detector
Gen. Al. 60 sec
delay
OR Front panel Lamp
Fan Al. 2 Loss –5V cannon connector
transition fan 2 9 pin
detector Al.
Remote
Inventory
Loss –5V
transition fan 3
Al.
Fan Al. 3 detector
Gen. Al.
RIBUS RIBUS Fan 1 Al.

Interface Fan 2 Al.
To/From
Fan 3 Al.
SAM
Backplane connectors
Fig. 96. Fans unit block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 176 / 326
326
2.7.9 Power Supply Units
Refer to para.2.6.10 on page 155, for the UHR/UHRC Power Supply system general description.
Fig. 97. on page 178 shows the unit block diagram.

In para.2.4.10 on page 130 the unit front panel and power line connector pinouts are shown.
The power supply unit converts the battery voltage into +5,2V; –5,2V; +3,4V and the output voltage for
ODU power. The input battery is duplicated for protection, (VB1 and VB2).
Each output voltage has a separate decoupled output for parallel operation.
The output voltage for the ODU power has the same value of input voltage reduced by the parallel diode
voltage drop.
The input section contains protection circuits for battery voltage polarity reversal and also the inrush
current control circuits to limit inrush current during power up.
A low–pass EMI filter follows, which prevents harmonics generated by the power stage and rectifier
circuits from being fed back to the battery.
The power stage circuit converts the battery voltage into a rectangular signal featuring a constant period
and a duty–cycle that varies as a function of the signal received from the power stage control circuit. The
output voltages are stabilized by comparing part of the output voltage to a reference voltage in a
comparator circuit. The error signal thus obtained controls the voltage stability via the power stage control
circuit.
The power supply circuit contains over-voltage, under-voltage, and overload protection.
A power supply fault sets the PSU alarm and switches-off the green LED operating indicator (1). A battery
fail sets the battery alarm.
Power Supply Technical Specification
Tab. 32. UHR/UHRC Power supply specification
–48 to 60 volt DC ± 20 % or
Input Voltage
± 24 V ± 20 %
98
Maximum Output Power
Watt
+ 5.2 V and +5.2V (diode)
Secondary power supply voltages –5.2 V and –5.2V (diode)
+3.4 V and +3.4V (diode)
Input battery voltage with reduction of 2V
Output to ODU
(The ODU is powered by the parallel battery voltage)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 177 / 326
326
–Vbat out
+ Battery 1 OR battery 1 and 2
GND
Power +5.2v

–Battery 1
Supply

+3.4v
+ Battery 2
GND – 5.2V
–Battery 2
Fail Supply Fail Battery
Fig. 97. Power supply unit block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 178 / 326
326
2.8 UHR/UHRC–ODU Transceiver Units Description
2.8.1 Introduction
The ODU transceiver operates from 15 to 38 GHz. The mechanical structure consists of a water–resistant
cabinet suitable for outdoor installation.
The mechanical solution is unique in the whole 18 to 38 GHz frequency band with minor changes in the
15 GHz band.
Two cabinet types are available: the first type contains a single RT, the second type contains two RTs in
protected configurations.
The 1+1 cabinet features one output port with one or two waveguides. This characteristic permits use of
the same cabinet (with two distinct parts numbers) for all configurations with one embedded single or dual
antenna and with a remote antenna.
Fig. 98. on page 180 shows the ODU Radio block diagram.
Each Radio Transceiver (ODU) is equipped with the following units:
– Transceiver unit
description starting on page 181
– Branching
– Portable Service Kit (for ODU maintenance)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 179 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Connection to
phone and service unit
Factory Test
UART
Fig. 98. ODU Radio block diagram
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
180 / 326
2.8.2 Transceiver Unit
The Transceiver unit consists of:

– RF Rx and RF Tx circuits
– IF Tx and IF Rx circuits
– Local Oscillator
– Service unit
– DC/DC Converter power supply.
The transceiver unit layout is shown in figure Fig. 99.
RF RX
IF RX
RADIO
INTERFACE
DC/DC
LOCAL
Converter
OSCILLATOR
225
IF TX
RF TX
180 60
Fig. 99. Transceiver layout
The transceiver inside the ODU module is connected to the IDU side (baseband and modem) through an
IDU–ODU interconnecting coaxial cable. The interconnecting coaxial cable transports two IF Tx and Rx
signals along with the service signal and the ODU module’s remote power supply.
The 420 MHz IF Tx signal is extracted from the cable interface circuit, is amplified, and forwarded to the
IF Converter which converts it to a higher IF signal. This new IF is further converted to the RF channel
frequency by the RF converter..
The RF signal is filtered through the RF Tx filter and sent to the antenna port on the channel circulator
related to the RF Branching circuit.
The RF Rx signal from the antenna is first filtered through the RF Branching filter and then amplified
through a low noise figure pre–amplifier. The RF signal is sent to the down converter where it is converted
to the 1080 MHz IF necessary for the demodulation function. The service circuit sends the IF Rx signal
to the demodulator inside the IDU module.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The MDR-9000s transmitter is fitted with ATPC whose function is illustrated in para.2.6.5 on page 147.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 181 / 326
326
Dual Local Oscillator
The local oscillator unit performs the following functions:

– supply the TX and RX local oscillator signals to the sub–harmonic converter

– supply the local oscillator signal for local loop (maintenance operations)

– supply the first conversion local oscillator signal in order to generate the IF transmission signal.
The various output signals are obtained by multiplying the signal coming from a synthesized VCO
controlled by a13 MHz TCXO.
Due to use of sub–harmonic converters, the local oscillator for Tx and RX operates at a frequency that
is one half the final frequency conversion.
The same LO unit contains an oscillator used for the first frequency conversion needed in the transmission
chain, and an oscillator at fixed frequency for the RF local loop maintenance operations.
The local loop oscillator generates a frequency shift between Tx and Rx.
The L.O. block diagram is shown in Fig. 100.
~ LO LOCAL LOOP
:N
Bus LO TX
TCXO ~ Xn
:N
Multiplier LO RX
Remote Bus
Inventory LO FIRST CONVERSION
Bias IF TX
~ IF LO
Bus :N
Data
Clock
LE
Unlock IF (420 MHz)
All. Bus
Fig. 100. L.O. block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 182 / 326
326
Radio Service Interface
The Radio Service Interface receives and sends service signals to the IDU UHR unit through the IF cable.
The main functions are:

– filtering to separate the four incoming signals

– cable interface and lightning protection
– management of data communications, control signals, and speech channel
– HST switch control (x2)
– alarms
– power supply conversion and distribution
A driver controller, inside the EPLD, allows full–duplex serial communication with the IDU unit at 1024
Kbit/s HDB3 coded data rates.
The alarms, commands, and all other information regarding the functionality of the ODU unit are arranged
in the registers of the EPLD connected to the SPRI–BUS (see .Fig. 101. ). Each register can take a
maximum of 64 bits.
The Portable Service Unit can be connected to the RS232 interface (LEMO connector) and used for
maintenance and RF signal checks.
Fig. 101. shows the block diagram of the Radio Service Interface circuit.
to IF and RF UNITS
ALARMS,
CONTROL HST Control (x2)
± 48/60 V To dc/dc 68hc908
converter To Local Oscillator
SPRI
SPI
UART
RS232
Connection
HDB3 EPLD
to portable
SPLITTER service unit
Phone
IF IN/OUT HDB3
CABLE
420 MHz
to IF TX unit
1080 MHz
from IF RX
unit
Fig. 101. Service Block Diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 183 / 326
326
2.8.3 RF Branching
The RF branching, inside the water–resistant housing, feature various configurations.

All branchings terminate, via waveguides, onto an antenna circulator, which separates the transmit section

from the receive section, thus allowing connection to the antenna.
N.B. The following descriptions and figures are relevant to 18 GHz ODU configurations.
The RF branchings available are:
1+0 compact branching
(see Fig. 102. on page 185)
The RF signal coming from the transmitter is connected to the antenna via point (1) of the Tx filter. Likewise,
on the receive side the RF signal inputs the receiver via point (2) of the Rx filter.
1+1/2+0 co-polar frequency diversity branching
The frequency diversity RF signals from the transmitters enter the antenna via points (1) and (2) of the
respective Tx filters. Likewise, on the receive side, the RF signal enters the receivers via points (3) and
(4) of their respective RX filters.
1+1/2+0 cross–polar / frequency diversity / frequency reuse single cabinet branching
Cross-polar branching is divided into two independent parts, each with individual antenna connections.
The RF signal coming from transmitter Tx1 is connected to the antenna via point (2) of the Tx filter.
Likewise, on the receive side, the RF signal enters the receiver via point (1) of the Rx1 filter.
The RF signal coming from transmitter Tx0 is connected to the antenna via point (4) of the Tx filter.
Likewise, on the receive side, the RF signal enters the receiver via point (3) of the Rx0 filter.
1+1 HST branching, one antenna
The hot–standby RF signal from the individual transmitters enters the RF switch, points (1) and (2); the
RF signal selected, point (3), enters the Tx filter for connection to the antenna. On the receive side, the
RF signal is filtered, sent through a power splitter or a directional coupler, and applied to both receiver
modules via points (4) and (5).
1+1 HST branching, two antennas (space diversity)
This branching is similar to that of 1+1 HST with one antenna, but a second RF switch is applied in order
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to have RT1 in service in case RT0 is missing or in fault. Both switches are active and driven by the same
command but are not on line at the same time.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 184 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
1
TX0
2
1
TX1
TX
2
3
RX
RX0
4
RX1
Fig. 102. 1+0 not ext. branching assembly
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Fig. 103. 1+1/2+0 Co-polar frequency diversity branching assembly
185 / 326
1 2 3 4
RX1 TX1 RX0 TX0
Fig. 104. 1+1/2+0 Cross–polar Freq. Diversity / Freq. Reuse 1 cabinet branching assembly
HST_Command TX FILTER RX FILTER
1 2 4 5
TX0 RX0 TX1 RX1
RT_0 RT_1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 105. 1+1 HST, single antenna branching assembly
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 186 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
TX1
955.203.322 M
RX1
RT_1
HST_Command
RT_0
Fig. 106. Station 1+1 HST Space Diversity

TX0
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
RX0
ODU
187 / 326
2.8.4 Portable Service Kit (PSK) (ODU maintenance)
The following information is covered in this paragraph:

– PSK General description

– PSK User instructions

– PSK Hardware presettings
2.8.4.1 General description
The output port (LEMO connector) present on the Radio Interface unit ODU allows connection of a PSK
to the transceiver unit.
The PSK unit consists of:
– 2 line Display
– UART Interface (RS232)
– Keyboard
– Telephone interface
– ODU interface connector
The PSK unit functions are:
– PTx/PRx tests
– APC, set max PTx (ATPC–off)
– RST, alarm reset
– ENG, turn on EOW line
– Communication between local IDU and remote IDU/ODU
• a call from the local IDU can be made towards the service kit
• a call from the service kit can be made towards the local IDU
• a call from the remote IDU/ODU can be made towards the service kit
• a call from the service kit can be made towards the remote IDU/ODU
The Equipment Craft Terminal (ECT) displays a manual operation alarm when the PSK is connected.
The ECT displays an alarm state of the ATPC function if the switch “ATPC Max” is in the ON position.
Two line
Display
(PRx & PTx)
Headphone
interface
Keyboard
UART
interface
(RS232)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 107. Portable Service Kit (PSK)
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 188 / 326
326
2.8.4.2 User instructions
At power–up the PSK displays “HAND CONTROL V x.x.x” for 10 seconds, then displays its telephone
number (set in factory) for another 10 seconds, and then behaves as described in the following:
– displays Tx and Rx power (normal operation).
⇒ PTx in dBm
in digital format with 0.1 dB of definition
⇒ PRx in dBm
in digital format (with 1.0 dB of definition) and in analog format (dBm +/– 1.5 dB), as shown in
following example:
TX 20.5dBm RX–48dBm
RX
The values are updated every second.
– Pushing the APC button forces the PTx nominal value. In this condition an “F” character is displayed.
– Pushing the APC button again cancels the forcing condition.
– When errors are present on the RT unit the“epsilon” (Ε, ε) letter is displayed. Pushing the F button
forces the PSK to display revealed errors for two seconds each. Errors can be any of the following:
⇒ OUTPUT POWER LEVEL ALARM
⇒ LOW GAIN ALARM
⇒ FIRST CONVERSION LO UNLOCKED
⇒ RF LO UNLOCKED
⇒ UNLOCKED LOCAL LOOP
⇒ DB DECREASE LEVEL RF LO
⇒ TX LOSS IF ALARM
⇒ CARD FAIL RX
⇒ THRESHOLD RX ALARM
⇒ SPRI FRAME ALARM
⇒ HDB3 LEVEL ALARM
After display, normal operation is automatically restored.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 189 / 326
326
2.8.4.3 Hardware presettings
COMM. ID DESCRIPTION

CM1 First digit for EOW phone number
CM2 Second digit where “0” must be set as “A”
CM2
CM1
Fig. 108. Portable Service Kit Hardware presettings

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 190 / 326
326
3 DESCRIPTION OF UHM/UHMC SUBSYSTEM
3.1 Introduction
Refer to the Alcatel 1603 Multiplexer instruction book.
1603 SMX Alcatel PN 3AL 03047 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 191 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
192 / 326
4 STATION LAYOUTS
4.1 Introduction to System Configurations for network solutions

The paragraphs that follow list and describe the most common of all the available system configurations
for the MDR9000s family covered by this handbook:
– Regenerator One Side and Two Sides (UHR/UHRC): see para.4.2 on page 195
– WMSN (UHR/UHRC + UHM/UHMC):
• One Side: see para.4.3 on page 212
• Two Sides: see para.4.4 on page 227
For each configuration a station layout, a simple system block diagram, and a short comment (if
necessary) are present.
For further configurations, refer to Alcatel organization.
General information and warnings for a correct interpretation of such layouts and block diagrams are given
below.
Refer to para.1.5 on page 81 for explanations of radio configurations.
Legend
AP = Alternate polar
CP = Co–polar
SD = Space Diversity
XPOL FR = Cross polar frequency reuse
Double Cabinet = two 1+0 ODU cabinets
FD =Frequency Diversity
FD PROT= FD with OC3/STM1 access line protected (see Fig. 73. on page 143)
FD UNPR= FD with OC3/STM1 access line unprotected (see Fig. 72. on page 143)
HST = Hot STandby

HST PROT= HST with OC3/STM1 access line protected (see Fig. 71. on page 142)
HST UNPR= HST with OC3/STM1 access line unprotected (see Fig. 70. on page 142)
1D = 1 STM1/OC3 drop insert

2D = 2 STM1/OC3 drop insert
OS = One side terminal

TS = Two sides terminal suitable for Drop/Insert or pass–through traffic between East and West sides
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 193 / 326
326
General information on STM1 physical connections
Although Station Layout and Block Diagram figures are drawn with a single line remember that each
OC3/STM1 physical connection is made up with two cables. For:

• electrical OC3/STM1 connection on EPS unit, refer to Fig. 60. on page 130

• OC3/STM1 connection on electrical module, refer to Fig. 93. on page 174
• OC3/STM1 connection on optical module, refer to Fig. 94. on page 174
General information on connections between UHR/UHRC and UHM/UHMC (WMSN

configurations)
– UHR/UHRC and UHM/UHMC are always co–located

– the connections between UHR/UHRC and UHM/UHMC are OC3/STM–1 electric
– in the UHM/UHMC one or two STM–1 electrical modules must be equipped on COMPACT ADM1/1
board
– in the UHR 1+1 the STM–1 interface of RRA EPS unit is used
– in the UHRC and 1+0 UHR extendible, one STM–1 electrical module must be equipped on
RRA/MODEM board
– in the UHR 2+0 one STM–1 electrical module must be equipped on both RRA/MODEM boards
N.B. In WMSN configuration the user side interfaces STM–1 or plesiochronous (140, 45, 34 and 2
Mbit/s) drawn in the following block diagrams and Figures, have to be considered in any case
as alternative taking into account that no mixed interfaces can be accepted by the Multiplex
assembly at the same time. In such figures, the UHM/UHMC is shown in the tributary
configuration 21x2Mbit/s 75 Ohm. Refer to the 1603 Multiplexer instruction book for other
configurations.
Warning about interconnection cables drawn in Station Layout figures
The drawings are just to show the end–to–end points of each connection and must not be used
to physically set–up the connections. Connections must be done taking into account the need
for extracting any board without removing non-relevant cables. Refer to MDR9000s Installation
Handbook (Ref.[2]) for detailed installation information e.g., cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling
rules, etc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 194 / 326
326
4.2 Station layouts for UHR/UHRC
4.2.1 Preface
For the correct interpretation of layouts and block diagrams, refer to para.4.1 on page 193.
The configurations described are:
1) Regenerator one side:
CONFIGURATION PARAGRAPH PAGE

1+0
MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 COMPACT 4.2.2 196
MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. CP 4.2.3 197
MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. AP 4.2.4 198

1+1 HST
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT 4.2.5 199
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT/SD 4.2.6 200
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST UNPR 4.2.7 201
1+1 / 2+0 HET
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HET PROT CP 4.2.8 202
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HET PROT AP 4.2.9 202
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HET UNPR CP 4.2.10 203
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HET UNPR AP 4.2.11 203
MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 HET CP 4.2.12 204
MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 HET AP 4.2.13 205
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HET AP DOUBLE CABINET 4.2.14 206
MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 HET AP DOUBLE CABINET 4.2.15 207
XPOL FR
MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 XPOL FR 4.2.16 208
MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 XPOL FR 4.2.17 209
MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR) 4.2.18 210
MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (2+0 XPOL FR) 4.2.19 211
2) Regenerator two sides:
The two sides terminal regenerator configuration are implemented by doubling the relative
terminal (two Network Elements from TMN point of view).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 195 / 326
326
4.2.2 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 Compact
The layout of the station and the scheme of principle are inserted in the following Fig. 109. and Fig. 110. ;
the system is composed of the following assemblies:

– 1 Regenerator 1+0 Compact
– 1 Outdoor unit 1+0 Compact :
• Wide band filters for frequency agility
• Narrow band filters for no frequency agility
ODU
TR 1+0
compact
OC3/STM1
External Lightning discharger
Fig. 109. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Compact: station layout
IDU 1+0 ( Reg.) ODU 1+0

OC3/STM1
RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
OPT/ELECT
S1.1
Fig. 110. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Compact: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 196 / 326
326
4.2.3 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. CP
The layout of the station and the scheme of principle are inserted in the following Fig. 111. and Fig. 112.
This station layout is also applicable for the:
– MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. AP.
The system is composed of the following assemblies:
– 1 Regenerator 1+1 (sub–equipped)

– 1 Outdoor 1+1 (sub–equipped) :
• Narrow band filters without frequency agility)
( TR 0 )
(0) TR 1
1 (0) 1
ODU
OC3/STM1 1+0
External Lightning discharger extendible
Fig. 111. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable CP or AP: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

EXTENSION EXTENSION
OC3/STM1 FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
OPT/ ELECT 1 1
S1.1
Fig. 112. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable CP: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 197 / 326
326
4.2.4 MDR 9000s REG. 1+0 EXP. AP
The layout of the station is illustrated in Fig. 111. on page 197; the scheme of principle is inserted in the
following Fig. 113.


– 1 Outdoor unit 1+1 (sub–equipped) :
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

EXTENSION EXTENSION
OC3/STM1 FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
OPT/ELECT TRANSCEIVER
RRA/MODEM
S1.1 1
1
Fig. 113. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+0 Expandable AP: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 198 / 326
326
4.2.5 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT
The station layout is also applicable for:

– MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT CP (para.4.2.8 on page 202)

– MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT AP (para.4.2.9 on page 202)
– 1 Regenerator 1+1
– 1 Outdoor unit 1+1 :
STM1
TR 0
ODU
0 1+1
TR 1
1
0 1
Fig. 114. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 PROT: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM–1
ELECT.
Fig. 115. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST PROT: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 199 / 326
326
4.2.6 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST PROT/SD


Connection to 2
not integrated
antennas
STM1
TR 0
0
TR 1
1
0 1
ODU
1+1 HST
Space Diversity
Fig. 116. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST SD: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0
ELECT. RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER

1 1
Fig. 117. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST SD: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 200 / 326
326
4.2.7 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 HST UNPR
This configuration should be used instead of REG. 1+1 HST PROT (see para.4.2.5 on page 199)
whenever you need optical STM–1 access (PROT configuration allows only electrical STM–1 access).
The station layout is applicable also for:
– MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR CP (para.4.2.10 on page 203)

– MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR AP (para.4.2.11 on page 203)
The system is composed by the following assemblies:
TR 0
ODU
0 1+1
TR 1
1
0 1
STM1
Fig. 118. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 UNPR: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

0 0
STM–1
OPT. S1.1 / RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
(ELECTR) 1 1
Fig. 119. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 HST UNPR: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 201 / 326
326
4.2.8 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT CP
following Fig. 120.

IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0

1 1
Fig. 120. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD PROT CP: block diagram
4.2.9 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD PROT AP
following Fig. 121.
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0

1 1
Fig. 121. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD PROT AP: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 202 / 326
326
4.2.10 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR CP
This configuration should be used instead of REG. 1+1 FD PROT CP (see para.4.2.8 on page 202)
following Fig. 122.

• Narrow band filters without frequency agility
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

0 0
STM–1
OPT. S1.1 / 1 1
(ELECTR)
Fig. 122. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD UNPR CP: block diagram
4.2.11 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD UNPR AP
This configuration should be used instead of REG. 1+1 FD PROT AP (see para.4.2.9 on page 202)
following Fig. 123.
• Narrow band filters without frequency agility
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

0 0
STM–1
OPT. S1.1 / RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
1 1
(ELECTR)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 123. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD UNPR AP: block diagram
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 203 / 326
326
4.2.12 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD CP


– MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP (para.4.2.13 on page 205)
STM1
TR 0
ODU
0 1+1
TR 1
1
0 1
STM1
Fig. 124. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD CP/AP : block diagram
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

2 x STM–1 0 0
ELECT./
OPT. S1.1 RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
1 1
Fig. 125. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD CP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 204 / 326
326
4.2.13 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP
following Fig. 126.
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

2 x STM–1 0 0
ELECT./
1 1
Fig. 126. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 FD AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 205 / 326
326
4.2.14 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet

– 2 Outdoor units 1+0 :
N.B. this configuration is a possible alternative to the standard 1+1 system. It can be a good solution
from the maintenance point of view allowing an easy and quick replacement of the complete
outdoor cabinet having a faulty transceiver. No external devices are required to connect the two
outputs of the 1+0 cabinet on the same polarisation in case of external antenna usage.
STM1
TR
0
2 x ODU 1+0
1 Compact
External Lightning discharger TR
Fig. 127. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout
ODU 1+0
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
TRANSCEIVER
RRA/MODEM
STM–1 0
ELECT. RRA/MODEM
1 TRANSCEIVER
ODU 1+0
Fig. 128. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 206 / 326
326
4.2.15 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet

• Wide band filters in case of ETSI mask 5 a) and frequency agility
• Narrow band filters in case of ETSI mask 5 b) without frequency agility
N.B. This configuration is a possible alternative to the standard 2+0 system. It can be a good solution
from the maintenance point of view allowing an easy and quick replacement of the complete
outdoor cabinet having a faulty transceiver. No external devices are required to connect the two
outputs of the 1+0 cabinet on the same polarisation in case of external antenna usage.
STM1 TR
0
2 x ODU 1+0
1 Compact
STM1
External Lightning discharger TR
ODU 1+0
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
TRANSCEIVER
RRA/MODEM
2 x STM–1 0
ELECT./
OPT. S1.1
RRA/MODEM
1 TRANSCEIVER
ODU 1+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 207 / 326
326
4.2.16 MDR 9000s REG. 1+1 XPOL FR

– 1 Regenerator 1+1 with XPIC kit

– 1 Outdoor unit 1+1 with XPIC kit :
STM1
TR 0
ODU
0 1+1
TR 1 XPIC
1
0 1
XPIC cross–connection
Fig. 131. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0

1 1
Fig. 132. MDR 9000s Regenerator 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 208 / 326
326
4.2.17 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 XPOL FR


• Wide band filters in the case of frequency agility
• Narrow band filters in the case of no frequency agility
STM1
TR 0
ODU
0 1+1
TR 1 XPIC
1
0 1
STM1
Fig. 133. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 XPOL FR: station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

2 x STM–1 0 0
ELECT./
1 1
Fig. 134. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2+0 XPOL FR: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 209 / 326
326
4.2.18 MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR)
The layout of the station corresponds to 2 assemblies, each of which has the layout depicted in
Fig. 131. on page 208. The scheme of principle is inserted in the following Fig. 135.

– 2 Regenerators 1+1 with XPIC kit

– 2 Outdoor units 1+1 with XPIC kit :
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0

1 1
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

STM–1 0 0

1 1
Fig. 135. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2 x (1+1/2+0 XPOL FR): block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 210 / 326
326
4.2.19 MDR 9000s REG. 2 x (2+0 XPOL FR)
The layout of the station corresponds to 2 assemblies, each of which has the layout depicted in
Fig. 133. on page 209. The scheme of principle are inserted in the following Fig. 136.

• Narrow band filtersfor no frequency agility
N.B. the system is suitable for the transmission of an STM–4 signal (4 STM–1 signals) with the
possibility to minimize the band occupation.
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

2 x STM–1 0 0
ELECT./
1 1
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

2 x STM–1 0 0
ELECT./
1 1
Fig. 136. MDR 9000s Regenerator 2 x (2+0 XPOL FR): block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 211 / 326
326
4.3 Station layouts for WMSN One Side
4.3.1 Preface

1) WMSN One Side:

1+0
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 COMPACT 4.3.2 213
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP 4.3.3 214
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP 4.3.4 215

1+1 HST
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST 4.3.5 216
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST S/D 4.3.6 217
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD CP 4.3.7 218
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP 4.3.8 219

1+1 / 2+0 FD
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP 4.3.9 220
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP 4.3.10 221
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP DOUBLE 4.3.11 222

CABINET
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP DOUBLE 4.3.12 223

CABINET
XPOL FR
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR 4.3.13 224
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR 4.3.14 225
MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR) 4.3.15 226

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 212 / 326
326
4.3.2 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact

– 1 Regenerator 1+0 Compact

– 1 Outdoor unit 1+0 Compact :
– 1 Multiplex
F ODU
A
B TR 1+0
Compact
External Lightning Discharger
Fig. 137. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact: station layout
STM1/OC3 . IDU (MUX)

T C
Elect/Opt C
O
R
A
O
M
IDU 1+0 ( Reg .) ODU 1+0
N F P
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1
I
M C C RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
28x1.5Mb/s O T ELECT.
D P
U O A
L R D
E T M
Fig. 138. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 Compact: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 213 / 326
326
4.3.3 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP
The layout of the station and the scheme of principle are inserted in the following Fig. 139. and Fig. 140. ;
the same layout is also applicable for the:

– MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP configuration.
The system is composedof the following assemblies:

• Narrow band filters for no frequency agility)
– 1 Multiplex
ODU
1+0 extendible
F
( TR 0 )
A
B
TR 1
(0) 1
Fig. 139. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP/AP: station layout

T C
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1
Elect/Opt C R O
O A M FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
N F P
N. F STM–1 EXTENSION EXTENSION
3x45 Mb/s I A
M C C
O T ELECT.
D P RRA/MODEM
U O A TRANSCEIVER
28x1.5 Mb/s L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 140. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. CP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 214 / 326
326
4.3.4 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP
following Fig. 141.

– 1 Multiplex

T C
IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1
Elect/Opt C R O
O A M FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
N F P
N. F STM–1 EXTENSION EXTENSION
3x45 Mb/s I A
M C C
O T ELECT.
28x1.5 Mb/s D P RRA/MODEM
U O A TRANSCEIVER
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 141. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+0 EXP. AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 215 / 326
326
4.3.5 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST


– 1 Multiplex
TR 0
F TR 1
A
B
0 1
ODU
1+1 HST
Fig. 142. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST: station layout
STM1/OC3 . IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

T C
Elect/Opt C R O RRA/MODEM
O A M TRANSCEIVER
N F
N. F P
STM–1 0 0
3x45 Mb/s I A
M C C
28x1.5 Mb/s O T ELECT.
D P
A
U O
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 143. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 216 / 326
326
4.3.6 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD

– 1 Multiplex
Connection to 2
non–integrated
antennas
0
TR 0
1
F
A TR 1
B
0 1
External Lightning discharger ODU

1+1 HST
Space Diversity
Fig. 144. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD: station layout

IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
T C
Elect/Opt C R O
O A M RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
N F P
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1 0 0
I
M C C
O T ELECT.
28x1.5 Mb/s D P RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
U O A
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 145. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 HST/SD: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 217 / 326
326
4.3.7 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD CP

The same layout is applicable also for the following configuration:

– MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP
– 1 Multiplex
0
TR 0
1
F TR 1
A
B
0 1
ODU
1+1
Fig. 146. MDR9000s WMSN OS ’1+1 FD CP/AP’ and ’1+1 XPOL FR’: station layout

IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
T C
C R O
Elect/Opt O A M RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
N F P
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1 0 0
I C
M C
O T ELECT.
28x1.5 Mb/s D P
A RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
U O
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 147. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD CP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 218 / 326
326
4.3.8 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP
following Fig. 148.
– 1 Multiplex

IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
T C
Elect/Opt C R O
N F P
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1 0 0
I C
M C
O T ELECT.
U O A
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 148. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 219 / 326
326
4.3.9 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP

The same layout is applicable also for the following configuration:

– MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP
• Narrow band filters without frequency agility)
– 1 Multiplex
0
TR 0
1
ODU
F TR 1 1+1
A
B
0 1
Fig. 149. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP/AP: station layout
IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM1/OC3
. T C
R O
Elect/Opt A M RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
F P 0
F A 2x 0
I C
C STM–1
T ELECT.
P RRA/MODEM
O A TRANSCEIVER
R D 1 1
T M
Fig. 150. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD CP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 220 / 326
326
4.3.10 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP
following Fig. 151.
– 1 Multiplex
IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

STM1/OC3 . T C
R O
Elect/Opt A M RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
F P 0
F A 2x 0
I C
C STM–1
T ELECT.
P RRA/MODEM
O A TRANSCEIVER
R D 1 1
T M
Fig. 151. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 221 / 326
326
4.3.11 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet


– 1 Multiplex
TR
ODU 1+0 Compact
1
F
A TR
B
ODU 1+0 Compact

Fig. 152. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout
ODU 1+0
STM1/OC3 . IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
T C
Elect/Opt C R O TRANSCEIVER
O A M RRA/MODEM
N F P
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1 0
I C
M C
O T ELECT.
28x1.5 Mb/s D P RRA/MODEM
U O A
L R D 1 TRANSCEIVER
E T M
ODU 1+0
Fig. 153. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 222 / 326
326
4.3.12 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet

– 1 Multiplex
TR
ODU 1+0 Compact
0
1
F
A TR
B
ODU 1+0 Compact
Fig. 154. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout
IDU (MUX)
ODU 1+0
STM1/OC3 T
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
C
R O TRANSCEIVER
A M
Elect/Opt F P RRA/MODEM
F A 2x
I C
C STM–1
T ELECT.
P
O A
R D RRA/MODEM
T M TRANSCEIVER
ODU 1+0
Fig. 155. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 223 / 326
326
4.3.13 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR


– 1 Multiplex
0
TR 0
1 ODU
1+1
F TR 1 XPIC
A
B 0 1
Fig. 156. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout
STM1/OC3 . IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

T C
Elect/Opt C R O
N F P 0
3x45 Mb/s N. F A STM–1 0
I C
M C
O T ELECT.
U O A
L R D 1 1
E T M
Fig. 157. MDR9000s WMSN OS 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 224 / 326
326
4.3.14 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR


– 1 Multiplex
0
TR 0
1 ODU
1+1
F TR 1
A XPIC
B
0 1
Fig. 158. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR: station layout
IDU (MUX) IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1

STM1/OC3 . T C
R O
A M RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Elect/OPT F P
F A 2x 0 0
I C
C STM–1
T ELECT.
P RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
O A
R D 1 1
T M
Fig. 159. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2+0 XPOL FR: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 225 / 326
326
4.3.15 MDR 9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR)


– 1 Multiplex

XPIC cross–connections
TR 0
A ODU
1+1
TR 1 XPIC
0 1
A0
A1
B0
TR 0
B1 B ODU
1+1
F TR 1 XPIC
A
B
0 1
Fig. 160. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR): station layout
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1

A0 A0
IDU (MUX)
STM1/OC3 . T C RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
R O
Elect/Opt A M A1 A1
F P
F A 2x
I C
C STM–1
P
T ELECT. IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
O A
R D RRA/MODEM
T M TRANSCEIVER
B0 B0
B1 B1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 161. MDR9000s WMSN OS 2 x (1+1 XPOL FR): block diagram
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 226 / 326
326
4.4 Station layouts for WMSN Two Sides
4.4.1 Preface
1) WMSN Two Sides

1+0
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 COMPACT 4.4.2 228
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 ENHANCED

4.4.3 229
(Under study, not available)
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP 4.4.4 230
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. AP 4.4.5 231

1+1 HST
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST 4.4.6 232
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST S/D 4.4.7 234

1+1 / 2+0 HET
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP 4.4.8 235
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP 4.4.9 236
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 1D 4.4.10 237
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D 4.4.11 238
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 2D 4.4.12 239
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D 4.4.13 240
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP DOUBLE

4.4.14 241
CABINET

4.4.15 243
CABINET 1D

4.4.16 245
CABINET 2D
XPOL FR
MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR 4.4.17 247

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 227 / 326
326
4.4.2 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact
The layout of the station and the scheme of principle are inserted in the following.The system is composed
of the following assemblies:

– 2 Regenerators 1+0
– 1 Multiplex
TR TR
External Lightning dischargers
ODU
ODU
1+0 Compact 1+0 Compact
F
A
B
Fig. 162. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact: station layout
ODU 1+0 IDU 1+0 ( Reg.) IDU 1+0 ( Reg.) ODU 1+0
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
STM–1 El. STM–1 El.

IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE
STM–1/OC3 . 3x45 Mb/s

28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 163. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Compact: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 228 / 326
326
4.4.3 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced Under study, not available

– 1 Multiplex
ODU 1+0 Compact ODU 1+0 Compact
TR External Lightning dischargers TR
F
A
B
Fig. 164. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced: station layout
ODU 1+0 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM
ODU 1+0
STM–1El.
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE
STM1/OC3 . 3x45 Mb/s

28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 165. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 Enhanced: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 229 / 326
326
4.4.4 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP

The same layout is applicable also for the:

– MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP configuration.
– 2 Regenerators 1+1 (sub–equipped)

– 2 Outdoor units 1+1 (sub–equipped) :
– 1 Multiplex
ODU ODU
1+0 extendible 1+0 extendible
( TR 0 ) ( TR 0 )
TR 1 TR 1
1 (0) (0) 1
(W0)
W1
(E0)
E1
F
A
B
Fig. 166. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP/AP: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 230 / 326
326
ODU 1+1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1
FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION EXTENSION EXTENSION EXTENSION

W1 W1 E1 E1
STM–1El. STM–1El.
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 167. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. CP: block diagram
4.4.5 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. AP
following Fig. 168. The system is composed of the following assemblies:
– 2 Regenerators 1+1 (sub–equipped)

– 2 Outdoor units 1+1 (sub–equipped) :
– 1 Multiplex
FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION EXTENSION EXTENSION EXTENSION

W1 W1 E1 E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El./ Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 168. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+0 EXP. AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 231 / 326
326
4.4.6 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST


– MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP
– MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP
– 1 Multiplex
ODU ODU
1+1 1+1
TR 0 TR 0
W E
TR 1 TR 1
1 0 External Lightning dischargers 0 1
W0
W1
E0
E1
F
A
B
Fig. 169. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 232 / 326
326
W0 W0 E0 E0
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM
W1 W1
E1 E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 170. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 233 / 326
326
4.4.7 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD


– 1 Multiplex
Connection to 2 Connection to 2
non–integrated non–integrated
antennas antennas
TR 0 ODU ODU TR 0
1+1 HST 1+1 HST
W TR 1 E
TR 1
1 0 0 1
W0
W1
E0
E1
F
A
B
Fig. 171. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 234 / 326
326
W0 W0 E0 E0
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
W1 W1
E1
E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 172. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 HST SD: block diagram
4.4.8 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP
following. The system is composed of the following assemblies:
– 1 Multiplex
W0 W0 E0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 173. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD CP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 235 / 326
326
4.4.9 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP
following. The system is composed of the following assemblies:

– 1 Multiplex
W0 W0 E0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 174. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 236 / 326
326
4.4.10 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 1D

– MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D
• Narrow band filters for no frequency agility)
– 1 Multiplex
ODU ODU
1+1 1+1
TR 0 TR 0
W E
TR 1 TR 1
F
A
B
Fig. 175. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP/AP 1D: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 237 / 326
326
ODU 1+1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) STM–1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM El
. RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
W0 W0 E0 E0
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM

TRANSCEIVER
W1 E1

W1 E1

STM–1
El.
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 176. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 1D: block diagram
4.4.11 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D
– 1 Multiplex
ODU 1+1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) STM–1

IDU 1+1 ( Reg .) ODU 1+1
TRANSCEIVER RRA/MODEM El. RRA/MODEM TRANSCEIVER
W0 W0 E0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
STM–1
El.
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE
STM–1/OC3 3x45 Mb/s

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 177. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 1D: block diagram
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 238 / 326
326
4.4.12 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 2D
The same layout is applicable also for the:

– MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D
– 2 Outdoor units 1+1
– 2 Multiplex
ODU ODU
1+1 1+1
TR 0 TR 0
W E
TR 1 TR 1
E0
E1
F
A
B
W0
W1
F
A
B
Fig. 178. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP/AP 2D: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 239 / 326
326
W0 W0 E0 E0

W1

W1

E1 E1
STM–1 STM–1
El. El.
IDU IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM COMPACT ADM (MUX)
TRAFFIC PORT TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE CONN. MODULE
STM–1/OC3 . 3x45 Mb/s 3x45 Mb/s STM–1/OC3 .

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s 28x1.5 Mb/s El/Opt
Fig. 179. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD CP 2D: block diagram
4.4.13 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D
– 2 Multiplex
W0 W0 E0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
STM–1 STM–1
El. El.
IDU IDU
STM1/OC3 . 3x45 Mb/s 3x45 Mb/s STM1/OC3

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s 28x1.5 Mb/s El/Opt
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 180. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP 2D: block diagram
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 240 / 326
326
4.4.14 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet

– 1 Multiplex
TR TR
4x
ODU 1+0 Compact
TR TR
W0
W1
E0
E1
F
A
B
Fig. 181. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 241 / 326
326
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
W0 RRA/MODEM STM–1 RRA/MODEM E0
W0 El. E0

RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
W1 E1
W1 E1
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 182. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 FD AP Double Cabinet: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 242 / 326
326
4.4.15 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D

– 1 Multiplex
TR TR
4x E
W
ODU 1+0 Compact
TR TR
F
A
B
Fig. 183. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D: station layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 243 / 326
326
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) STM–1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
El.
W0 RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM E0
W0 E0

STM–1

RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
W1 El. E1
W1 E1
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 184. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 1D: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 244 / 326
326
4.4.16 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D

– 2 Multiplex
TR TR
4x
W E
ODU 1+0 Compact
TR TR
F
A
B
F
A
B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 185. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D: station layout
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 245 / 326
326
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) STM–1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.)
TRANSCEIVER El TRANSCEIVER
W0 RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM E0
W0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
ODU 1+0 ODU 1+0
IDU IDU
STM1/OC3 . 3x45 Mb/s 3x45 Mb/s STM1/OC3 .

El./ Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s 28x1.5 Mb/s El./ Opt
Fig. 186. MDR9000s WMSN TS 2+0 FD AP Double Cabinet 2D: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 246 / 326
326
4.4.17 MDR 9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR


– 1 Multiplex
ODU ODU
TR 0 1+1 1+1 TR 0
XPIC XPIC
TR 1 TR 1
W0
W1
XPIC cross–connections
E0
E1
F
A
B
Fig. 187. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR: station layout

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 247 / 326
326
ODU 1+1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) STM–1 IDU 1+1 ( Reg.) ODU 1+1
TRANSCEIVER El. RRA/MODEM

W0 W0 E0 E0

W1 W1 E1 E1
IDU
(MUX) COMPACT ADM
TRAFFIC PORT
CONN. MODULE
STM–1/OC3. 3x45 Mb/s

El/Opt 28x1.5 Mb/s
Fig. 188. MDR9000s WMSN TS 1+1 XPOL FR: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 248 / 326
326
4.5 Procedures for Station Layout change
This paragraph describes the procedures, introduced according to Customer general requirements,
necessary to change the Station Layout from one to another configuration.
The presently available procedures are listed in the following Tab. 33.
Tab. 33. Procedures for Station Layout change
PROCEDURE
STARTING CONFIGURATION TARGET CONFIGURATION
paragraph & page
REG. 1+1 FD UNPR REG. 2+0 FD 4.5.1 pg.250
REG. 1+1 FD REG. 2+0 FD 4.5.2 pg.251
General notes
– These procedures make reference, for example layouts and block diagrams, to the configurations
illustrated in the previous paragraphs 4.2 on page 195, 4.3 on page 212, and 4.4 on page 227. For
the correct interpretation of layouts and block diagrams, and other general notes, refer to para.4.1
on page 193.
– Before starting a procedure verify you have all materials necessary for the configuration change.
– Operations by Craft Terminal are not detailed in terms of effective commands to be forwarded as well
as checks to be performed. It is assumed that Personnel carrying out the operations involved has
the necessary knowledge and skill.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 249 / 326
326
4.5.1 From ’REG. 1+1 FD UNPR’ to ’REG. 2+0 FD’
a) References
For station layouts and block diagrams, refer to the figures associated to the following paragraphs:

paragraph paragraph
NAME NAME
& page & page
4.2.10 4.2.12
REG. 1+1 FD UNPR CP REG. 2+0 FD CP
pg.203 pg.204
4.2.11 4.2.13
REG. 1+1 FD UNPR AP REG. 2+0 FD AP
pg.203 pg.205
b) Envisaged trafiic loss duration

1 min
c) Procedure
OPERATION TRAFFIC
STEP
TYPE (*) DESCRIPTION INTERRUPTION
1 – Read General Notes in para.4.5 page 249 –
2 CT Force Rx signal on RRA/MODEM 1 –
Configure STM1 Electrical/Optical module on

3 CT –
RRA/MODEM 0
Insert STM1 Electrical/Optical module on

4 PH –
RRA/MODEM 0 and connect STM1 cables/fiber
5 PH Extract SAM
Loss of service channels
On SAM, move dip–switch I3 for setting 2+0 (EOW, TMN, 64kbit/s, etc.)
6 PH
configuration (ref.Tab. 22. on page 128).
7 PH Insert SAM Service channels recovered
8 CT Verify station status –
END OF PROCEDURE
(*) CT=by Craft Terminal PH=intervention on physical items

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 250 / 326
326
4.5.2 From ’REG. 1+1 FD’ to ’REG. 2+0 FD’
a) References
For station layouts and block diagrams, refer to the figures associated to the following paragraphs:
paragraph paragraph
NAME NAME
& page & page
4.2.8 4.2.12
REG. 1+1 FD CP REG. 2+0 FD CP
pg.202 pg.204
4.2.9 4.2.13
REG. 1+1 FD AP REG. 2+0 FD AP
pg.202 pg.205
b) Envisaged trafiic loss duration

10 min
c) Procedure
OPERATION TRAFFIC
STEP
TYPE (*) DESCRIPTION INTERRUPTION
1 – Read General Notes in para.4.5 page 249 –
2 CT Prepare ’2+0’ configuration –
3 CT Send ’2+0’ configuration to the Network Element
4 PH Switch off both Power Supply units on IDU
5 PH Disconnect STM1 cables from EPS unit
6 PH Remove EPS unit
7 PH Extract SAM
Total traffic loss
Insert STM1 Electrical/Optical module on
8 PH RRA/MODEM 0 and 1, and connect STM1
cables/fiber to both.
On SAM, move dip–switch I3 for setting 2+0

9 PH
configuration (ref.Tab. 22. on page 128).
10 PH Insert SAM
11 PH Switch on both Power Supply units on IDU System restarts
12 CT Wait about 3 minutes, then verify sation status Traffic recovered
END OF PROCEDURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(*) CT=by Craft Terminal PH=intervention on physical items
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 251 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
252 / 326
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter refers to the MDR-9000s System as a whole, and to UHR/UHRC subsystem for
detailed information. References to UHM/UHMC subsystem specific Technical Specifications
(contained in 1603 manual) are clearly indicated.

This paragraph indicates the nominal values and, within brackets, the limit values (if any).
The guaranteed values are those given in the contract.
5.1 General Characteristics
Station type 1+0, 1+1, 2+0

Regenerator
Wireless Multiservice Node
System configurations:
Regenerator
1+0 compact (1+0 UHRC)

1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR)
1+1 HST (1+1 UHR)
1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR)
1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1 UHR)
1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization (1+1 UHR)
1+1 HST space diversity
Regenerator & MUX
1+0 compact (1+0 UHRC plus multiplex)

1+0 extendible (1+0 UHR plus multiplex)
1+1 HST (1+1 UHR plus multiplex)
1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity one antenna (1+1 UHR plus multiplex)
1+1; 2+0 frequency diversity two antennas (1+1 UHR plus multiplex)
1+1; 2+0 with cross–polarization (1+1 UHR plus multiplex)
1+0 compact East West (2 x 1+0 UHRC plus multiplex)
Space diversity (hitless switch) For 1+1 HST only
Transmission capacity 1 x OC3
Modulation types 128 / 32 / 16 QAM
Operating frequency band (*) (within 14.5 – 40.0 GHz)
RF frequency plan (*) (depends on the system)
Minimum Tx–Rx spacing (*) (within 700 – 1500 MHz)
(*) The value depends on the R/T used; see the specific Appendix.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 253 / 326
326
Frequency reuse XPIC YES
Requested XPD Antenna > 30 dB

Protection RPS 1+1

Switching method Hitless revertive and not revertive
RPS switching time < 1 ms (from alarm detection)
Tx/Rx static delay equalization bits 256 (one bit steps)
Dynamic recoverable delay bits ± 20
Input / output signal electrical interface ITU–T G. 703
Interface connector Siemens 1.0 / 2.3 connector

Code CMI
Signal level 1 Vpp
Return loss < –15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz
Input cable equalizer > 12.7 dB at 78 MHZ as
Jitter Max input ITU–T G.825

Max output ITU–T G.813
Transfer function ITU–T G.813
Input / output signal optical interface ITU–T G. 957
Interface and SC connector S1.1 type FC–PC

Operating wavelength 1260 - 1360 nm
Min. sensitivity –28 dBm
Min. overload –8 dBm
Output mean launched power –8 (max) ; –15 (min) dBm
Jitter Max input ITU–T G.825

Max output ITU–T G.813
Transfer function ITU–T G.958
DCCR (D1 - D3)

Managed internally by the shelf controller
Bit rate 192 Kbit/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DCCM (D4 - D12)

Not managed, bypass condition
Bit rate 576 Kbit/s
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 254 / 326
326
5.2 Characteristics of IF and RF connections
5.2.1 IDU–ODU interconnection

– Connectors N type 50 ohm
– Lightning protection 5KV 10/700 microsec. CCITT K17
– Type of cable for lenght up to 220 m Filotex ET390998
– Type of cable for lenght up to 250 m Celliflex 1/4
– Type of cable for lenght up to 350 m Celliflex 3/8
– VSWR admitted value < 1.15 (equivalent Return Loss > 23 dB)
measured at 420 MHz and 1,080 MHz.
5.2.2 ODU to external antenna connection
The system performances are directly related to the Antenna return loss value as well as to the ODU to
antenna cable connection return loss value; the Tx/Rx antenna circulator common port input return loss
is as follows:
– 20 dB for all the frequencies, in Alternate Polar or Co–Polar configurations
– 23 dB for 1+1/2+0 Frequency Diversity Co–Polar configurations from 6L to 15 GHz
Taking into account what above mentioned and taking into account the ODU to antenna cable attenuation,
find two examples for 128 QAM and 16 QAM modulation in the following Tab. 34. and Tab. 36.
If a cable with a different attenuation is available, then the proper ratio has to be applied to the values
according to the attenuation introduced by the cable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 255 / 326
326
Tab. 34. ODU to external antenna connection – 128QAM
N.B. Note: the figures refer to 128QAM system considering a cable attenuation of 2 dB/10 meters.
In any case the recommended value for antenna VSWR is ≥ 15 dB.

RF CABLE LENGTH MINIMUM ANTENNA
(meters/feet) RETURN LOSS (db)
0 to 5 m / 0 to 16.5 ft 24
5 to 10 m / 16.5 to 32.8 ft 23
10 to 15 m / 32.8 to 49 ft 21
15 to 20 m / 49 to 65.6 ft 19
20 to 25 m / 65.5 to 82 ft 17
> 25 m / 82 ft 15

N.B. Note: the figures refer to 32QAM system considering a cable attenuation of 2 dB/10 meters. In
any case the recommended value for antenna VSWR is ≥ 15 dB.

0 to 5 m / 0 to 16.5 ft 24
5 to 10 m / 16.5 to 32.8 ft 23
10 to 15 m / 32.8 to 49 ft 21
15 to 20 m / 49 to 65.6 ft 19
20 to 25 m / 65.5 to 82 ft 17
> 25 m / 82 ft 15

N.B. Note: the figures refer to 16QAM system considering a cable attenuation of 2 dB/10 meters. In
any case the recommended value for antenna VSWR is ≥ 15 dB.

0 to 1 m / 0 to 3.3 ft 23
1 to 2.5 m / 3.3 ft to 8.2 ft 20
2.5 to 5 m / 8.2 to 16.4 ft 19
5 to 10 m / 16.4 to 32.8 ft 18
10 to 12.5 m / 32.8 to 41 ft 16
> 12.5 m / 41 ft 15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 256 / 326
326
5.3 Unit Characteristics
5.3.1 Transceiver
5.3.1.1 General characteristics

IF (cable interface) Tx 420 MHz
Rx 1080 MHz
Nominal receiver level –30 dBm
IF nominal level input = –7 to –31 dBm ± 1
output = –2 dBm ± 1
L.O. frequency stability ± 10 ppm
AGC range > 60 dB
AGC response time < 100 dB/sec
Transmitted spectrum:
OC-3 128 QAM (typical shape is reported in
Fig. 189. page 258 and Fig. 190. page 259
OC-3 32 QAM TBA
OC-3 16 QAM TBA
HST coupler losses 3.5 to 4 dB both paths or 1:11 dB
Tx and Rx spurious signal emission compliant with relevant ETS (EN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 257 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Fig. 189. Transmitted spectrum for STM–1, 128 QAM systems with narrow band filters
258 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Fig. 190. Transmitted spectrum for STM–1, 128 QAM systems with wide band filters
259 / 326
5.3.1.2 Frequency dependent characteristics
Notes for Tab. 37. :

– ‘n.a.’ = not applicable

– * = tolerance:
• " 0.5 dB in ambient temperature
• "1.5 dB in temperature range –33 0C to +50 0C (ODU) and –5 0C to +50 0C (IDU)
Tab. 37. 15 GHz – 38 GHz R/T characteristics (modulation 128, 32, and 16 QAM)
ITEM QAM R/T Frequency
Nominal Freq. (GHz) 15 18 23 38
MDR–9418s9 MDR–9423s MDR–9438s

Product Nomenclature MDR–9715s 518s 9523s 9538s
9718s 9723s 9738s
Freq.Range (GHz) 14.4–15.35 17.7–19.7 21.2–23.6 38.6–40.0
RF Transmitted Power 128 + 20 + 18.75 + 18.75 +11

with ATPC (dBm)
32 n.a. + 19 + 19 +13
measured at antenna
interface* 16 n.a. + 19.75 + 19.75 + 14
RF Transmitted Power 128 + 18 + 16.75 + 16.75 +9

without ATPC (dBm)
32 n.a. + 17 + 17 +11
measured at antenna
interface* 16 n.a. + 17.75 + 17.75 + 12
128 10 8 8 7
Max ATPC range (dB) 32 n.a. 8 8 7
16 n.a. 9 9 7
128 – 66.5. –67.75 –67.25 –65.5

RF Received threshold
32 n.a. –70.75 –70.25 –69.5
at BER = 10E–6 (dBm)
16 n.a. –74.25 –73.75 –71.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 260 / 326
326
5.3.2 Regenerator and Modem
IF nominal level input = –2 to –52 dBm ± 1
output = –5 dBm ± 1
Modem:
Modem digital filter 36 taps

Demodulation coherent
Adaptative equalizer 19 taps
C/N 128 QAM STM1 / OC3

BER 10E–3 24 dB (23 dB)
BER 10E–4 24.7 dB (23.6 dB)
BER 10E–6 26 dB (24.7 dB)

BER 10E–3 15.3 dB (14.3 dB)
BER 10E–4 16.1 dB (15 dB)
BER 10E–6 17.8 dB (16.5 dB)

BER 10E–3 15.3 dB (14.3 dB)
BER 10E–4 16.1 dB (15 dB)
BER 10E–6 17.8 dB (16.5 dB)
Regenerator:
Input / output signal 155.520 Mbit/s ± 4.6 ppm
155.520 Mbit/s ± 20
(*) The value depends on the R/T used; see the specific Appendix.
5.3.3 UHM/UHMC equipment
Refer to the Alcatel 1603 Multiplexer Instruction book.
1603 SMX Alcatel PN 3AL 03047 AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 261 / 326
326
5.4 Optical Safety
5.4.1 Related Units

The optical safety characteristics and related precautions addressed here, to avoid possible exposure to
hazardous laser radiation, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed in the equipment units
with OC-3 interfaces:
– in UHR/UHRC subsystem: RRA/MODEM unit
– in UHM/UHMC subsystem:
• Refer to the Alcatel 1603 Multiplexer Instruction book.
– 1603 SM Alcatel PN 3AL 03018 AAAA
– 1603 SMX Alcatel PN 3AL 03047 AAAA
5.4.2 Hazard Level classification
The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces is given in Tab. 38. on page 262.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60825–1 (1993) and IEC
60825–2 (1993).
Tab. 38. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT OPTICAL INTERFACE HAZARD LEVEL
S–1.1 (short haul) 1
L–1.1 (long haul) 3A

OC-3
L–1.2 (long haul) 3A
L–1.2JE1 (long haul) 3A
5.4.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in Tab. 39. on page 263.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 262 / 326
326
Tab. 39. Parameters specified for OC-3 Optical Interfaces (Refer. points are per ITU-T G.957)
CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL OC-3 according to G.707 and G.958

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 155520
Application code (Table 1/G.957) S–1.1 L–1.1 L–1.2 L–1.2 JE1
Operating wavelength range nm 1261–1360 1280–1335 1480–1580 1530–1560
TRANSMITTER AT REFERENCE
POINT S
Source type MLM MLM SLM SLM
Spectral characteristics
maximum RMS width nm 7.7 4 – –
maximum –20 dB width nm – – 1 1
minimum side mode

dB – – 30 30
suppression ratio
Mean launched power
maximum dBm –8 0 0 0
minimum dBm –15 –5 –5 –4
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10 10
OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S AND R
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–28 10–28 13–33
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 100 250 1900 3200
Minimum optical return loss of cable

dB NA NA 20 20
plant at S, including any connectors
Maximum discrete reflectance between

dB NA NA –25 –25
S and R
RECEIVER AT REFERENCE POINT R
Type of detector In Ga As In Ga As In Ga As In Ga As
PIN PIN PIN PIN
Minimum sensitivity (BER 10–10) dBm –28 –34 –34 –38
Minimum overload dBm –8 –10 –10 –13
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 1
Maximum reflectance of receiver

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
dB –14 –14 –25 –25

measured at R
N.A = not applicable
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 263 / 326
326
5.4.4 Labelling
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the OC-3 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical

module. The customer will affix the label on the fiber protection cover of the involved card, depending on

the particular interface of the module (OC-3 port). The following description specifies when the customer
must affix the label.
[1] Standard label for all modules
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label is put on the fiber protection cover of all involved cards (see para.5.4.1 on page 262).
[2] Standard Label for Hazard Level 3A modules
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A (see Tab. 38. on page 262) carry the following
hazard symbol label:
The label is affixed near the optical connectors on the front panel of the following interfaces:
• L–1.1 (OC-3 PORT)
• L–1.2 (OC-3 PORT)
• L–1.2JE1 (OC-3 PORT)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 264 / 326
326
[3] Additional alternative Labels for Hazard Level 3A modules
a) L–1.1 interface
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A (see Tab. 38. on page 262) and
operate at 2nd window, carry the following explanatory label (a multilanguage label kit is
also provided):
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31mW, = 1300 nm IEC 825 1993
The label is affixed by the customer on the fiber protection cover of the involved card (see
para.5.4.1 on page 262) housing the L–1.1 interface.
b) L–1.2 or L–1.2JE1 interface
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A (see Tab. 38. on page 262) and
operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label (a multilanguage label kit is
also provided):
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=50 mW, = 1550 nm IEC 825 1993
The label is affixed by the customer on the fiber protection cover of the involved card (see
para.5.4.1 on page 262) housing the L–1.2 or L–1.2JE1 interface.
[4] Multilanguage Label Kit
The multilanguage label kit, for OC-3 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag containing the module
and explanatory labels (in English language).
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same espalanations as above
in the following languages:
• Italian
• French
• Spanish
• German
The customer may affix the appropriate language labels directly on the pre–existing ones or, in case
of OC-3 ports, directly on the fiber protection cover of the involved card (see para.5.4.1 on page 262)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 265 / 326
326
5.4.5 Aperture and fiber connectors
The locations of apertures and fiber connectors are identified in topographical drawings of unit and access
cards front views:

– in paragraph 2.4 starting on page 117 (UHR/UHRC subsystem)
5.4.6 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fiber through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fiber breakage, to minimize exposure times, implement ALS procedure according to
ITU–T G.958 Rec. on OC-3 ports.
ALS timing must not be longer than the maximum specified in G.958.
5.4.7 Safety instruction
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.1.8
on page 25.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 266 / 326
326
5.5 Power Supply Characteristics
Power consumption measured at the battery input of the PSU with 10% tolerance.
5.5.1 System
Input battery source –48 to -60 Vdc
Power consumption:
FREQUENCY (GHz)
CONFIGURATION QAM
15 18 23, 38
128 75 70 75
1+0 Compact Regenerator 32 n.a. 70 75

16 n.a. 75 80
128 138 125 138
1+1 HST Regenerator 32 n.a. 125 138

16 n.a. 135 148
128 135 122 135
1+1 / 2+0 FD Regenerator 32 n.a. 122 135

16 n.a. 132 145
128 115 110 115
1+0 Compact WMSN OS 32 n.a. 110 115

16 n.a. 115 120
128 178 165 178
1+1 HST WMSN OS 32 n.a. 165 178

16 n.a. 175 188
128 175 162 175
1+1 / 2+0 FD WMSN OS 32 n.a. 162 175

16 n.a. 172 185
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 267 / 326
326
5.5.2 ODU Equipment
Power consumption:

FREQUENCY (GHz)
CONFIGURATION QAM
15 18 23, 38
128 40 35 40
1+0 Compact 32 n.a. 35 40

16 n.a. 35 40
128 83 70 83
1+1 HST 32 n.a. 70 83

16 n.a. 70 83
128 80 67 80
1+1 / 2+0 FD 32 n.a. 67 80

16 n.a. 67 80
5.5.3 UHR/UHRC Regenerator and modem
Power consumption:
FREQUENCY (GHz)
CONFIGURATION QAM
15 18 23, 38
128 40 35 40
1+0 Compact 32 n.a. 35 40

16 n.a. 35 40
128 83 70 83
1+1 HST 32 n.a. 70 83

16 n.a. 70 83
128 80 67 80
1+1 / 2+0 FD 32 n.a. 67 80

16 n.a. 67 80
XPIC Option 15

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Refer to 1603 instruction book.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 268 / 326
326
5.6 Alarm Characteristics
5.6.1 IDU–RRA/MODEM Equipment

Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40 pins connector (see Tab. 18. page 124)
Alarm characteristics
– open contact : "72 volt < V <–2 volt I < 0.2 mA
– closed contact : "72 volt < V < 0 volt I < 50 mA
Refer to 1603 SM Alcatel manual.
5.7 Mechanical Characteristics
5.7.1 UHR/UHRC Equipment
Dimensions and weight:
1+0 Regenerator IDU 445 mm/17.5 inx258 mm/10.17 inx44.45 mm/1.75 in

(1U) mm
5 Kg/11 lb
1+1 Regenerator IDU 445 mm/17.5 inx258 mm/10.17 inx88.9 mm/3.50 in

(2U) mm
10 Kg/ 22 lb
1+0 ODU 260 mm/8.84 inx342 mm/1.09 inx90 mm/3.1 in

8 Kg/17.6 lb
1+1 ODU 268 mm/9.1 inx277 mm/9.4 inx250 mm/8.5 in

17 Kg/37.47 lb
5.7.2 UHM/UHMC Equipment
Refer to 1603 SM Alcatel manual.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 269 / 326
326
5.8 Environmental conditions
5.8.1 Compliance with European Norms

Essential Requirements Specifications / Standards
EN 60 215:1995
Safety (R&TTE, Article 3.1a)
EN 60 950:1992 Amendment 1:1993 + Amendment 2:1993
EN 301 489–1 V.1.2.1

EMC (R&TTE, Article 3.1b) EN 301 489–4 V.1.2.1
Only MUX: ETS 300 386–2
MDR-9000s System International Standards
9715 OC-3 128 QAM EN 300 234
9418 OC-3 16 QAM

9518 OC-3 32 QAM EN 300 430
Radio Spectrum 9718 OC-3 128 QAM
(R&TTE, Article 3.2)
9423 OC-3 16 QAM
9523 OC-3 32 QAM EN 300 198
9723 OC-3 128 QAM
9438 OC-3 16 QAM EN 300 197

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 270 / 326
326
5.8.2 Operating climatic conditions
a) Temperature and humidity

IDU Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 3.1; 3.2 (–5 °C to + 45 °C) (N.B.)
ODU Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 4.1 (–33 °C to + 40°C) (N.B.)
and class 4.1E (–45 °C to + 45 °C) (N.B.)
N.B. In any case a wider range of operating temperature and humidity can be guaranteed to meet
specific Customer requirements:
GUARANTEED UNDER TEST
–5°C/+23°F to +50°C/+122°F with fans

IDU –5°C/+23°F to +55°C/+122°F with fans
5% to 95% humidity
–33°C/–27.4°F to +50°C/+122°F
ODU –45°C/–49°F to +55°C/+131°F
8% to 100% humidity
b) Mechanically active substances for IDU
ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
Environmental Parameter Value
a) Sand 30 mg/m3
b) Dust (suspension) 0.2 mg/m3
c) Dust (sedimentation) 1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Unit operation. For further information, see para.6.6.2
on page 288.
c) Cabinet protection grade Compliant with IEC 529 or equivalent IEC 68–2–18 IP X5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 271 / 326
326
5.8.2.1 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
See climatogram on Fig. 191. on page 273

This applies to locations:

– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. Equipment may also
be exposed to surrounding air movement due to drafts in buildings, e.g. through open windows.
Equipment may be subjected to dew and presence of water from sources other than rain and icing
but not subjected to precipitation;
– where mold growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– in close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to hardly perceptible vibrations.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
– building entrances and staircases;
– garages;
– cellars;
– certain workshops;
– factories and industrial process plants;
– unattended equipment stations;
– certain telecommunication buildings;
– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, etc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 272 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Fig. 191. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
273 / 326
5.8.2.2 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 721–3–3 [3].

This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not

controlled. The climatogram is shown in Fig. 192. , page 274.
60
50
45
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
40
35
30
25
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20
20
10
5
0
–5
–10
1.5
1.0
–20
–30
–40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits.
Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits

have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
ÇÇÇÇ Values outside this field have a probability of oc-

currence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
721–3–0 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature control system
Fig. 192. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to maintain the required conditions –
especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or low
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
temperatures.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 274 / 326
326
This class applies to locations:
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to surrounding air movements due to drafts in buildings. Locations are not subjected to dew,
precipitation, or water from sources other than rain or icing;

– without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that mold growth and attacks by animals, etc.
are not likely to occur;
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
– normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theaters, restaurants);
– offices;
– shops;
– workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
– telecommunication centers;
– storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 275 / 326
326
5.8.3 Storage
The equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:

ETS 300 019, class 1.2

Class 1.2 weatherproofed, not temperature–controlled storage location.
This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Fig. 193. on page 277.
This class applies to storage locations:
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: Equipment
may also be exposed to surrounding air movements due to drafts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. Equipment may be subjected to dew, dripping water, icing, and limited wind–driven
precipitation including snow;
– where mold growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this class may occur in:
– unattended buildings;
– some entrances of buildings;
– some garages and shacks.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 276 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Fig. 193. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
277 / 326
5.8.4 Transportation
Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 2.3

The equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation:

ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2 Careful transportation.
This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken, e.g. with respect to low
temperature and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of trucks
and trailers in areas with well–developed road systems.
This also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shock–reducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard
packing:
–40° C/–40° F for 72 hours maximum
without damaging the optical interfaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 278 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
MAINTENANCE
279 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
280 / 326
6 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN PERFORMING GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE NORMS STATED IN PARA.1.9.3
6.1 General safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.1.8 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard
operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them thoroughly prior to performing any action on the equipment.
SAFETY RULES
General
Observe and obey the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical
connections while equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to remove power during the maintenance phase,

proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as station power upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,

low-impedance, dc circuits can generate severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Optical safety
DANGER: Possibility of eye damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.1.8.4.2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 281 / 326
326
6.2 Overall Operations
The relevant Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook (Ref.[4] on page 17) thoroughly analyzes Alarms and
Failures.

From the software point of view, the UHR/UHRC and UHM/UHMC subsystems are two different Network
Elements (as explained in Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook).
To locate the operative points and the visual indicators (LEDs) of each board refer to:
– para. 2.3 on page 158 for UHR/UHRC subsystem
– 1603 SM handbook.
6.3 Instruments and accessories
6.3.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PC) which allows display of all alarms and which manages the equipment. The
relative processing is described in the operator’s handbook.
When a Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) is implemented, an Operation System will

display alarms and manage all the connected equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 282 / 326
326
6.3.2 Maintenance Tool Kit
The following Tab. 40. lists the items contained in the Maintenance Tool Kit (Factory P/N 299702815 –
ANV P/N 3DB01398AA). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 40. Maintenance Tool Kit
ITEMS FACTORY P/N NOTES

BAGS
Tool bag 810.704.305 W
Maintenance Tool bag 870.704.306 X
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS
Fixed spanner 8 x 10 870.952.110 J
Fixed spanner 16 x 17 870.952.129 R
Fixed spanner 17 x 19 870.952.131 B
Screwdriver 3 x 100 870.959.130 V
Screwdriver 3.5 x 100 870.959.140 F
Screwdriver 5.5 x 200 870.959.166 V
Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60 870.959.530 W
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80 870.959.540 G
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250 870.959.565 V
Poligon spanner 17 870.952.417 A
Poligon tube spanner 5 870.952.705 T
Poligon tube spanner 6 870.952.706 U
Torque wrench 870.952.302 X
Special fixed spanner 5.5 mm 879.010.249 D
Special fixed spanner 7 mm 879.010.250 A
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRIST–BAND
Antistatic wrist–band 041.172.011 Y
Antistatic applications cord 041.911.001 U see para.1.10
Plug with crocodile pliers 041.172.010 B on page 35
Female button termination 248.501.099 Y
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor 245.701.842 S see Fig. 194.
Electrical/Optical module extractor 241.901.305 V on page 284
SPECIAL CABLES
Coaxial cable – N RG223 – N 900 RG223 041.962.665 L
Coaxial cable – N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm (x2) 041.962.683 F see Fig. 195.
Coaxial cable – Male1.6/5.6 – Male1.0/2.3 (x4) 041.962.264 J on page 285
PC–TR cord 041.992.604 F
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 283 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
Electrical/Optical module extractor
Fig. 194. Special extractors
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
284 / 326
IDU SIDE ODU SIDE
Coaxial cable – N RG223 – N 900 RG223

Used to connect locally IDU and ODU in indoor premises
TR CONNECTOR
IDU SIDE
SIDE
Coaxial cable – N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm

Used to connect locally IDU and ODU (directly on TR connector)
in indoor premises
MEASUREMENT 1.0/2.3
INSTRUMENT CONNECTOR
SIDE SIDE
Coaxial cable – Male1.6/5.6 – Male1.0/2.3

Used to connect a measurement instrument to any 1.0/2.3 connector
(e.g. 155 Mbit/s electric, 2 Mbit/s, etc.)
PC SIDE TR CONNECTOR
SIDE
PC–TR cord
Used for operating directly on TR registers for special procedures
Fig. 195. Special cables for maintenance

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 285 / 326
326
6.4 Set of spare parts
6.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on customer requirements, and should be based on the average
nimber of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depends on thenumber of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts should include a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–in
unit.
With regard to ODU equipment:
a) the spare parts usually supplied are:

• the Tranceivers
• the Local Oscillators
• the Adapter Kits (only for the configurations 1+1 / 2+0 / 1+0 EXP)
Changing a Tranceiver and/or a Local Oscillator as individual parts requires opening the ODU and
work that usually cannot be done directly on the antenna pole.
b) in the ODU configuration 1+0 Compact ( also used in the Station Configurations 1+1 / 2+0 Double
Cabinet) it is suggested to have, as spare part, a complete ODU cabinet, fully equipped and pretested
at the correct operating frequency. This will allow a very fast system restore to service in case of ODU
fault since the 1+0 Compact cabinet light weight should not present problems with this kind of
replacement. The repair of the removed faulty cabinet can be done later and more comfortably in a
maintenance center (or in the room housing IDU equipment).
c) in the ODU configurations 1+1 / 2+0 , completely changing the ODU cabinet is generally not
acceptable, as that would affect the operation of the channel still working.
d) in the ODU configuration 1+0 Extendible, the solution described in point b ) could be adopted, but
considerations about the cabinet weight can exclude it.
For the configurations c ) and d ) , the best solution to speed up the replacement procedure and to
minimize the out–of–service time is to have an assembly ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ already assembled and
pre–tested at the correct operating frequency. In this way the replacement of the assembly as a whole can
be done directly on the antenna pole; the repair of the removed faulty assembly can be made later and
more comfortably in a maintenance center (or in the room housing IDU equipment).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 286 / 326
326
6.4.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing spare units ensure they are in working condition by inserting them in operating equipment.
It is recommended that spare units not used for over a year be checked periodically.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, ensure that the spare parts are
placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and dampness. The spares should also be well grounded
to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building, or site,
ensure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
– if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
6.5 Maintenance aspects
Maintenance consists of a set of operations to maintain or return the assembly to optimum operating
conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
• ROUTINE
• CORRECTIVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 287 / 326
326
6.6 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is a set of periodic measurements and checks. This type of maintenance discovers
devices whose functions have deteriorated over time and require adjustment or replacement.

6.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year
It is rcommended that the following operations be done yearly:
[1] Mechanical checks
Check that:
• power supply units,
• coaxial cables,
• waveguides,
• mounting fixtures
are connected correctly.
[2] Grounding check
Check that racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.
[3] IDU Operative checks
• Visual check:
– During normal operation, check that the green LEDs are ON.
• Check the following functions:

– Automatic switches
– Alarms
[4] Software checks
Use the Craft Terminal to check system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the reference
Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses, and
forcings.
6.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Unit
The MTBF of the Fans Unit equipped in IDU shelf (UHR/UHRC and, if equipped, UHM/UHMC) is over 30
years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are in the limits specified by
Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point b ) on page 271). Even though the operating environment is
compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation every three years:
– pull out Fans Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.
In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 288 / 326
326
6.7 Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting)
6.7.1 General
Corrective maintenance begins when an alarm message is generated or a green LED on the power supply
units of the system assemblies turns OFF. A red lamp simultaneously lights up on the rack top.
Under these conditions, the switch operator can press the SAM unit alarm storage push–button; this turns
the rack red lamp off and the yellow lamp on.
The switch operator can also store the alarm via the craft terminal.
If another alarm activates before the previous fault is repaired, the red lamp will turn on again.
When the fault has been repaired, and the alarm stored the yellow lamp will turn on. If the alarm has not
been stored and no further alarms have occurred the red lamp will turn off.
To continue the troubleshooting procedure, use the Craft Terminal to view and diagnose the alarms
present.
The troubleshooting operating instructions are included in the ”Alarm status” procedure in the
Operator Handbook .
The operating instructions allow identification of faulty units for all system assemblies. After locating the
fault, replace the faulty unit/module with a spare.
With regard to ODU repair, make reference to para.6.7.3 on page 290.
ATTENTION :
Prior to replacement, the spare unit/module must be preset exactly the same as the faulty unit/module.
For hardware presettings, refer to Hardware setting documentation section in this handbook.
Any software presettings present on the faulty unit are automatically set by the equipment controller on
the spare unit after its installation.
6.7.2 Fans Unit replacement in case of alarm
Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Unit arises, you should be aware of the following:
– the alarm is always MINOR (because traffic is not affected) and arises for the failure of one, two or
of all the three fans of the unit; in general, when the alarm arises, you can assume that one fan only
is not working;
– this condition should be considered in conjunction with:
• the IDU–housing–room effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration that the
loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside IDU;
• and the temperature limits specified in point a ) on page 271.
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion, the Fans unit alarm is a minor alarm and usually does not require an immediate intervention;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
neverthless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting a very long
time.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 289 / 326
326
6.7.3 ODU Repair
6.7.3.1 ODU 1+0 Compact

a) A complete ODU cabinet, fully equipped and pretested at the correct operating frequency, is

available:
ODU replacement:
1) Switch off power supply on IDU
2) Get the complete spare ODU cabinet
N.B. If you are not sure of the spare ODU cabinet operating frequency:
– disconnect IDU–ODU cable at IDU side
– connect the spare ODU cabinet to IDU through the Coaxial cable – N RG223
– N 900 RG223 (see Tab. 40. on page 283)
– switch on power supply on IDU
– through the Craft Terminal, verify the TR frequency and, in the case it is different
from situation before the fault, adjust it (this could be necessary in case of
Frequency Agility)
– switch off power supply on IDU
– connect again IDU–ODU cable at IDU side
3) Carry the complete spare ODU cabinet to the antenna pole
4) Disconnect IDU–ODU cable at ODU side (from faulty ODU cabinet)
5) Dismount faulty ODU cabinet from antenna pole and ..
6) .. mount spare ODU cabinet (see Installation Handbook)
7) Connect IDU–ODU cable at ODU side (to spare ODU cabinet)
8) Carry faulty ODU cabinet to the maintenance center
9) Switch on power supply on IDU
10 ) Carry out functional checks
Faulty ODU repair:
Refer to annexed document ODU MAINTENANCE (see Tab. 47. on page 324)
b) Only Tranceivers and Local Oscillators are available as spare parts:
6.7.3.2 ODU 1+0 Extendible, 1+1, 2+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 290 / 326
326
6.8 Repair Form
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 196. on
page 292.
The repair form must be filled in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 291 / 326
326
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 196. Repair form
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 292 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
APPENDICES
293 / 326
This section contains the frequency dependent parts of the different systems of the MDR-9000s family.
Each appendix is dedicated to a frequency band and contains the specific parts of the system layout, the
frequency plan, and the technical specifications that are peculiar to this system.

Note: This handbook contains, as appendices, the detailed description of R/T subsystem
equipment configuration data as well as technical characteristics relevant to product releases
for which Appendix is defined in the following table.
Tab. 41. List of Appendices
FREQUENCY
PRODUCT MODULATION APPENDIX
RANGE (GHz)
MDR-9715s 14.40 - 15.35 128 QAM A
MDR-9418s 16 QAM
MDR-9518s 17.70 - 19.70 32 QAM B
MDR-9718s 128 QAM
MDR-9423s 16 QAM
MDR-9523s 21.20 - 23.60 32 QAM C
MDR-9723s 128 QAM
MDR-9438s 38.60 - 40.00 16 QAM D
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 294 / 326
326
APPENDIX A : MDR-9715S
A.1 15 GHz Frequency Plan

Position of the RF LO (OL+/OL–) with respect to the TX frequency: OL+ for carrier frequency in the lower
half RF band; OL– for carrier frequency in the upper half RF band.
The LO TX and RX frequencies within the same RT are identical.
For simple transmission of a single OC-3 per RF frequency, the channel plans allow the use of a single
polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double
polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration for alternated channels saving bandwidth.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 295 / 326
326
15 GHz Frequency Plans, MDR-9715s
1.1 US Plan, 14.500 -15.350 GHz
Transmit/Receive separation: 640 MHz

14.5 14.710 15.140 15.35
7 X 30 MHz 7 X 30 MHz
1.2 Industry Canada Plan, 14.500 -15.350 GHz

14.5 14.660 14.820 14.875 14.975 15.135 15.295 15.35
4 X 40 MHz 4 X 40 MHz 4 X 40 MHz 4 X 40 MHz

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 296 / 326
326
A.1.1 Frequency dependent parts
Tab. 42. Regenerator Transceivers, Local Oscillators, and Filters

LAYOUT split mount system MDR-9715s

NAME ALCATEL P/N

ODU
14.4 - 15 GHz TRANSCEIVER 3DB00831AAAA
15 - 15.35 GHz TRANSCEIVER 3DB00832AAAA
L.O. TX/RX SEPARATION 475 MHz
14501 - 14687 MHz L.O. 3DB02632AA
14688 - 14873 MHz L.O. 3DB02633AA
14976 - 15162 MHz L.O. 3DB02630AA
15163 - 15348 MHz L.O. 3DB02631AA
14501 - 14708 MHz L.O. 3DB02830AA
15141 - 15348 MHz l.o. 3DB02829AA
ODU – FILTERS
CH.1 WBF 640 MHz SEPARATION 3DB02104AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 297 / 326
326
A.1.2 Technical Specification
The following paragraphs indicate the nominal values and, within brackets, the limit values (if any).


Tx–Rx spacing US 640 MHz
Canada 475 MHz
Transceiver characteristics
RF transmitted power (measured at antenna interface):
Modulation type Standard With ATPC dBm
128 QAM +20
RF Receiver threshold at BER = 10E–6, (measured at antenna interface):
Modulation type OC–3 Traffic

Received power dBm
128 QAM –66.5
Modulation type OC–3 Traffic

Received power dBm
128 QAM –66.5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 298 / 326
326
Power Supply Characteristics
System
Power consumption 128 QAM:

1+0 Regenerator Compact ≤ 70 W

1+1 HST Regenerator ≤ 130 W
1+1/2+0 FD Regenerator ≤ 130 W
ODU equipment

1+0 Compact ≤ 40 W
1+1 HST ≤ 80 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 80 W
Regenerator and modem

1+1 HST ≤ 50 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 50 W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 299 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
300 / 326
APPENDIX B : MDR-9418S / 9518S / 9718S
B.1 18 GHz Frequency Plan

The RF Local Oscillators have a 125 MHz approximate operating band corresponding to 250 MHz as Tx
frequency.
Position of the RF LO (OL+/OL–) with respect to the TX frequency: OL+ for frequency ranging from 17.5 to
18.5 GHz; OL– for frequency ranging from 18.5 to 19.5 GHz.
For simple transmission of a single OC-3 per RF frequency, the channel plan allows the use of a single
polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration for alternative channels saving bandwidth.
The frequency agility feature is available when the transceivers are equipped with wide-band branching
filters.
The frequency can be either locally or remotely changed via the ECT only.
To operate with frequency agility:

– the TX/RX frequency must be within the local RF LO range
– the TX/RX frequency must be within the remote RF LO range
– the local and remote RTs must be operating
– there must not be a 5 sec. (approx.) time–out occurrence (max. locking time for the LO and for the
whole system)
The frequency agility operation is not executed if:

– the TX/RX frequency is not within the local RF LO range
– the TX/RX frequency is not within the remote RF LO range
– if the local and remote RTs are not already operating
– after a 5 sec. (approx.) time–out (max. locking time for the LO and for the whole system)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 301 / 326
326
18 GHz Frequency Plans, MDR-9X18s
1.3 US Plan, 17.7 -19.7 GHz

17.7 18.14 19.26 19.7
14 X 30 MHz 14 X 30 MHz
11 X 40 MHz 11 X 40 MHz
8 X 50 MHz 8 X 50 MHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 302 / 326
326
B.1.1 Frequency dependent parts

LAYOUT split mount system MDR-9X18s

NAME ALCATEL P/N
ODU
17.7–18.7 GHz TRANSC. 128 3DB00764AAAA
17.7–18.7 GHz TRANSC. 32 TBD*
18.7–19.7 GHz TRANSC. 32 TBD*
17710 - 17910 MHz L.O. 3DB01860AA
17920 - 18130 MHz L.O. 3DB01861AA
19270 - 19470 MHz L.O. 3DB01858AA
19480 - 19690 MHz L.O. 3DB01859AA
ODU – FILTERS
WIDE BAND FILTER CH.1 3DB00041AA
WIDE BAND FILTER CH.1’ 3DB00042AA
*TBD = To be determined
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 303 / 326
326
B.1.2 Technical Specification
The following tables indicate the nominal values and, within brackets, the limit values (if any).


Tx–Rx spacing 1560 MHz
RF transmitted power (measured at antenna interface’):

128 QAM +18.75
32 QAM +19.00
16 QAM +19.75
Modulation type OC-3 Traffic

Received power dBm
128 QAM –67.75
32 QAM –70.75
16 QAM –74.25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 304 / 326
326
System


ODU equipment

1+1 HST ≤ 80 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 80 W

1+1 HST ≤ 50 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 50 W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 305 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
306 / 326
APPENDIX C : MDR-9423S / 9523S / 9723S
C.1 23 GHz Frequency plan

frequency.
The position of the RF LO (OL+/OL–) with respect to the TX frequency: OL+ for frequency ranging from 21.5
to 22.5 GHz; OL– for frequency ranging from 22.5 to 23.5 GHz.
For simple transmission of a single OC-3 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single
The frequency agility feature is available when the transceivers are equipped with wide-band branching
filters.
The frequency can be either locally or locally and remotely changed via the ECT only.

– the local and remote RTs must be operating
whole system)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 307 / 326
326
23 GHz Frequency Plans, MDR-9X23s
1.4 North American Plan, 21.2 -23.6 GHz

Transmit/Receive separation : 1200 MHz:
21.2 1 21.8 2 22.4 1P 23.0 2P 23.6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 308 / 326
326
C.1.1 Layout – Frequency dependent parts

LAYOUT split mount system MDR–9X23s

NAME ALCATEL
P/N
ODU
LOW BAND TRANSC.128 3DB00768AAAA
HIGH BAND TRANSC.128 3DB00769AAAA
LOW BAND TRANSC. 32 TBD*
HIGH BAND TRANSC. 32 TBD*
LOW BAND TRANSC.16 3DB00770AAAA
HIGH BAND TRANSC.16 3DB00771AAAA
21201 - 21500 MHz L.O 3DB02581AAAA
21501 - 21798 MHz L.O 3DB02582AAAA
21801 - 22100 MHz L.O 3DB02583AAAA
22101 - 22398 MHz L.O 3DB02584AAAA
22401 - 22700 MHz L.O 3DB02577AAAA
22701 - 22998 MHz L.O 3DB02578AAAA
23001 - 23300 MHz L.O 3DB02579AAAA
23301 - 23598 MHz L.O 3DB02580AAAA
ODU – FILTERS
CH.1L W.B. FILTER 3DB02691AAAA
CH1’L W.B. FILTER 3DB02692AAAA
CH.1H W.B. FILTER 3DB02693AAAA
CH.1’H W.B. FILTER 3DB02694AAAA
*TBD = To be determined
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 309 / 326
326
C.1.2 Technical Specification



128 QAM +18.25
32 QAM +19.00
16 QAM +19.75

Received power dBm
128 QAM –67.25
32 QAM –70.25
16 QAM –73.75
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 310 / 326
326
System


ODU equipment

1+1 HST ≤ 80 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 80 W

1+1 HST ≤ 50 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 50 W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 311 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
312 / 326
APPENDIX D : MDR-9438S
D.1 38 GHz Frequency Plan

frequency.
The position of the RF LO (OL+/OL–) with respect to the TX frequency: OL+ for frequency ranging from 24.5
to 25.5 GHz; OL– for frequency ranging from 25.5 to 26.5 GHz.
For simple transmission of a single OC-3 per RF frequency, the channel plan allows the use of a single
The frequency agility feature is available when the transceivers are equipped with wide band branching
filters.
The frequency can be either locally or locally and remotely changed via the ECT only.

– the local and remote RTsmuat be operating
whole system)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 313 / 326
326
38 GHz Frequency Plans, MDR-9438s
1.5 North American Plan, 38.6 - 40.0 GHz
Transmit/Receive separation : 700 MHz:

38.6 1 38.95 2 39.3 1P 39.65 2P 40.0
MW210–0066–1H
092497
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 314 / 326
326
D.1.1 Frequency dependent parts

LAYOUT split mount system MDR-9438s

NAME ALCATEL
P/N
ODU
37.0 – 38.2 GHz TRANSC. 16 3DB00839AAAA
38.2 – 39.5 GHz TRANSC. 16 3DB00840AAAA
38625 - 39275 MHz L.O. 3DB02616AA
39325 - 39975 MHz L.O. 3DB02615AA
ODU – FILTERS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 315 / 326
326
D.1.2 Technical Specification



16 QAM +14

Received power dBm
16 QAM –71.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 316 / 326
326
System


1+1 HST Regenerator ≤130 W
1+1/2+0 FD Regenerator ≤130 W
ODU equipment

1+1 HST ≤ 80 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 80 W

1+1 HST ≤ 50 W
1+1/2+0 FD ≤ 50 W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 317 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
318 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
319 / 326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
320 / 326
This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 47. on page 324, according to the ANV part number.
TABLE EXPLANATION:
– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS
Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
• a dual Part No.:
– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible
alternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and
”ANV P/N + ICS”
Tab. 46. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’
FACTORY CODE ANV CODE
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
in section HANDBOOK GUIDE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 321 / 326
326
– CROSS–REFERENCE
• Id. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.
• App. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the sub–unit belongs.

The HARDWARE SETTINGS can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to
a unit, by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents
indicated in Tab. 47. page 324 and presented in the following point.
– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
”ANV P/N”–MSxxx
is annexed to this handbook.
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the
CD–ROM containing it is burned.
Use of the document MSxxx:

• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:
– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
N.B. To make ”TC” Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective
cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the
operation
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 47. on page 324, which
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
shows the ’ON’ (closed) position of microswitches.

Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 322 / 326
326
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 46. on page 321:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
FROM CS FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
1 01 ––AA 01
2 03 ––AC 01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01
487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 323 / 326
326
LIST OF ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
Tab. 47. Hardware presetting documentation

The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is

the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.
WARNING ABOUT RRA–MODEM

Different types of RRA–MODEM units are listed in this table. Be sure to use the correct
document MSZZQ, according to the unit P/N.
ANV/PIN Enclosed
Id NAME App.
(Factory PIN) Document
ANNEXES
3DB 03268 AAAA

ODU MAINTENANCE
MSZZQ
3AL 79090 AB––

a Compact ADM 1/1
(411.101.231 T)
–
3DB 00142 AA––

b MUX SERVICE UNIT
(411.200.479 T)
–
3DB 00143 AA––

c AUX SERVICE & MANAGEMENT
(411.200.480 R)
–
RRA–MODEM 128 QAM

This P/N is no longer produced. It 3DB 00144 AA––
d is left in the table as information (411.200.481 E)
–
for previous supplies.
RRA–MODEM 128 QAM 3DB 00144 BA––

e STM1–STM0 (411.200.534 A)
–
3DB 00275 AA––

f RRA–MODEM 16 QAM
(411.200.482 F)
–
3DB 00511 AA––

g SERVICE KIT
(411.200.483 G)
–
3DB 02289 AA––

h RRA–MODEM 128 QAM STM1
(411.200.541 R)
–
3AL 37747 0001 3AL 37747 0001

Microswitches’ ON positions
(962.000.022 F) MSZZQ
Equipment Shelf Controller 3AL 78909 AA–– 3AL 78909 AAAA

(ESCON)
a, c (487.156.584 R) MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 324 / 326
326
ANV/PIN Enclosed
Id NAME App.
(Factory PIN) Document
RRA–MODEM 128 QAM

This P/N is no longer produced. It 3DB 01417 AA–– 3DB 01417 AAAA
is left in the table as information
d (487.210.480 F) MSZZQ
for previous supplies.
S.A.M. 3DB 01419 AA–– 3DB 01419 AAAA

See also para.2.4.6 on page 126
c (487.210.482 V) MSZZQ
3DB 01438 AA–– 3DB 01438 AAAA

RRA–MODEM 16 QAM f (487.210.486 Z) MSZZQ
3DB 01491 AA–– 3DB 01491 AAAA

Service kit g (487.210.489 C) MSZZQ
3DB 01734 AA–– 3DB 01734 AAAA

RRA–MODEM e (487.230.542 C) MSZZQ
3DB 02291 AA–– 3DB 02291 AAAA

RRA–MODEM STM1–CR h (487.210.604 P) MSZZQ
Portable Service Kit (PSK)

–
See para.2.8.4.3 on page 190
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 325 / 326
326
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
955.203.322 M
END OF DOCUMENT
326
3EM 07818 A AAA
326 / 326
2G–URBAN MW SYSTEMS
INDICE – TABLE OF CONTENTS
LISTA DELLE FIGURE E TABELLE – LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1 INTRODUZIONE–INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1 Lingua – Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Storia del documento – Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Abbreviazioni – Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4 Scopo del documento – Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Riferimenti – References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.6 Distribuzione – Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 STRUTTURA DEL DOCUMENTO – DOCUMENT STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3 PRECAUZIONI – CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Generalità – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Manipolazione cavi – Cable handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.4 Parti meccaniche calde – Heat–radiating mechanical parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.5 Radiazioni microonde – Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 ATTREZZI NECESSARI – REQUIRED TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5 PARTI DI RICAMBIO – SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

5.1 Generalità – General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Tipi di LO – LO types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6 CONFIGURAZIONI DI SISTEMA – SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PROC. A : ODU 1+0 COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PROC. B : ODU 1+1/2+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
PROC. C : ODU 1+0 EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
PROC. D : LO 6–7–8 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
PROC. E : LO 11 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
02 020124 S402012301 S.SOLIMENA ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO

U.CORNEO
01 010712 S.SOLIMENA ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO
U.CORNEO E.ANGHILIERI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MANUTENZIONE ODU
ODU MAINTENANCE
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 1 / 100
100
PROC. F : LO 13–15 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
PROC. G : LO 18–23–25 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

PROC. H : LO 28–38 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

PROC. I : TR 6–7–8 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PROC. J : TR 11 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
PROC. K : TR 13–15 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PROC. L : TR 18–23–25 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PROC. M : TR 28–38 GHZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 2 / 100
100
LISTA DELLE FIGURE E TABELLE – LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURE – FIGURES
Fig. 1. Cavo coassiale – Coaxial cable – N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Fig. 2. Cavo coassiale – Coaxial cable – N RG223 – N 900 RG223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Fig. 3. LO 6–11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fig. 4. LO 13–38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Fig. 5. UHRC–UHDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 6. UHR–UHD con with 1 x ODU ’1+1/2+0’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 7. UHR – UHD con with 2 x ODU ’1+0 COMP’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 8. UHRN con with 2 x ODU ’1+1/2+0’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 9. UHRN con with 4 x ODU ’1+0 COMP’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 10. ODU 1+0 COMP: apertura/chiusura –
ODU 1+0 COMP: opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 11. ODU 1+0 COMP: scollegamento/collegamento TR –
ODU 1+0 COMP: TR disconnection/connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 12. ODU 1+0 COMP: sbloccaggio/bloccaggio TR –
ODU 1+0 COMP: TR unblocking/blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 13. Scollegamento cavo IDU–ODU
IDU–ODU cable disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 14. Sbloccaggio/bloccaggio coperchio ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0 –
ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0 cover unblocking/blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 15. Apertura/chiusura ODU –
ODU opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 16. Rimozione guide d’onda –
Wave guide remotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 17. ODU–XPIC 6–8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 18. ODU–XPIC 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 19. ODU–XPIC 13–15 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 20. ODU–XPIC 18–23–25 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 21. Disconnessione altri cavi –
Disconnection of other cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 22. Sbloccaggio e rimozione TR –
TR unblocking and remotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 23. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 6–8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 24. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 6–15 GHz (XPIC adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 25. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 26. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 13–15 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 27. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 18–23–25 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 28. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 18–23–25 GHz (XPIC adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 29. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 28–38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 30. TR 6–7–8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 31. TR 6–7–8 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP
TR 6–7–8 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 32. TR 6–7–8 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0
TR 6–7–8 GHz: 1+0 EXP./ 1+1/2+0 adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 33. TR 11GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 34. TR 11 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP
TR 11 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 35. TR 11 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
TR 11 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Fig. 36. TR 13–15 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 3 / 100
100
Fig. 37. TR 13–15 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP –
TR 13–15 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 38. TR 13–15 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 –
TR 13–15 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Fig. 39. TR 18–23–25 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Fig. 40. TR 18–23–25 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP –
TR 18–23–25 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 41. TR 18–23–25 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 –
TR 18–23–25 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 42. TR 28–38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
TR 28–38 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
TR 28–38 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
TABELLE – TABLES
Tab. 1. Capitoli introduttivi – Introductive chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Tab. 2. Procedure principali – Main procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Tab. 3. Procedure per la sostituzione LO – LO replacing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Tab. 4. Procedure per la sostituzione TR – TR replacing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Tab. 5. Tipi di TR singoli –Types of individual TRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tab. 6. Tipi di LO singoli –Types of individual LOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tab. 7. Tipi di TR + LO – Types of TRs + LOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tab. 8. Tipi di TR + LO + kit adattatori – Types of TRs + LOs + adapter kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 4 / 100
100
1 INTRODUZIONE–INTRODUCTION
1.1 Lingua – Language

Questo è un documento bilingue Italiano–Inglese. Le parti in Inglese sono in corsivo. Le figure sono
comuni.
This is a bilingual Italian–English document. Parts in English are in Italic. Figures are common.
1.2 Storia del documento – Document history
La prima e le due più recenti edizioni del documento sono indicate nell’indice. Le modifiche rispetto
all’edizione precedente sono segnalate con barre di revisione.
The first and the two most recent editions of the document are indicated in the table of contents. Changes
with respect to the previous edition are pointed out by revision bars.
1.3 Abbreviazioni – Abbreviations
LO Oscillatore Locale Local Oscillator

TR Ricetrasmettitore RF RF Tranceiver
1+0 COMP ODU 1+0 Compatto ODU 1+0 Compact
1+0 EXP ODU 1+0 Espandibile ODU 1+0 Expandable
1.4 Scopo del documento – Document scope
Il documento illustra la sostituzione in campo degli LO e TR sulle unità ODU del sistema radio urbano
Alcatel 9600USY. La sostituzione descritta è a parità di codici parte guasta=parte sostituita.
This document describes the in–field replacement of LOs and TRs equipped in ODU units of Alcatel
9600USY and MDR9000s urban radio systems. The kind of described replacement is based on the
equivalence faulty–unit P/N=replacing unit P/N.
1.5 Riferimenti – References
Il documento non indica i codici delle parti sostituibili. Fare riferimento al Manuale Tecnico e/o al Manuale
di Installazione (N.B.) per recuperare questa od altri tipi di informazione non presenti in questo documento.
I codici tra parentesi presenti nelle figure ( es. (474.210.139 HDZZQ_01) ) sono esclusivamente di uso interno
Alcatel.
N.B. Alla data di emissione di questo documento il Manuale Tecnico ed il Manuale di Installazione
sono disponibili esclusivamente in lingua Inglese (’Technical Handbook’ e ’Installation
Handbook’).
This document does not indicate the P/Ns of the replaceable parts. Reference must be done to the
Technical Handbook and/or Installation Handbook for this and any other information not given in this
document.
The P/Ns in brackets present in figures ( e.g. (474.210.139 HDZZQ_01) ) are for Alcatel internal use only.
1.6 Distribuzione – Distribution

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Questo documento viene normalmente fornito come allegato dei Manuali Tecnici che lo richiamano.
Usually, this document is enclosed to the Technical Handbooks which recall it.
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 5 / 100
100
2 STRUTTURA DEL DOCUMENTO – DOCUMENT STRUCTURE
Prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione, leggere i capitoli indicati nella seguente Tab. 1. :
Before doing anything, please read chapters indicated in following Tab. 1. :

Tab. 1. Capitoli introduttivi – Introductive chapters
CAPITOLO TITOLO
PAG.
CHAPTER TITLE
1 INTRODUZIONE – INTRODUCTION 5
2 STRUTTURA DEL DOCUMENTO – DOCUMENT STRUCTURE 6
3 PRECAUZIONI – CAUTIONS 7
4 ATTREZZI NECESSARI – REQUIRED TOOLS 8
5 PARTI DI RICAMBIO – SPARE PARTS 9
6 CONFIGURAZIONI DI SISTEMA – SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 16
La procedura principale a cui accedere dipende dal tipo di ODU, come indicato nella seguente Tab. 2. :
The main procedure to access depends on the ODU type, as indicated in following Tab. 2. :
Tab. 2. Procedure principali – Main procedures

TIPO ODU
PROC. PAG.
ODU TYPE
1+0 COMP A 20
1+1 / 2+0 B 27
1+0 EXP C 45
Le procedure indicate nelle seguenti Tab. 3. e Tab. 4. sono richiamate dalle procedure principali:
The procedures listed in following Tab. 3. e Tab. 4. are called by main procedures:
Tab. 3. Procedure per la sostituzione LO – LO replacing procedures

FREQUENZA
PROC. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–8 GHz D 53
11 GHz E 57
13–15 GHz F 60
18–25 GHz G 63
28–38 GHz H 67
Tab. 4. Procedure per la sostituzione TR – TR replacing procedures

FREQUENZA
PROC. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–8 GHz I 70
11 GHz J 76
13–15 GHz K 82
18–25 GHz L 88
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
28–38 GHz M 94
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 6 / 100
100
3 PRECAUZIONI – CAUTIONS
3.1 Generalità – General

Osservare tutte le precauzioni indicate nella ’Guida al Manuale’ (Handbook Guide) del Manuale Tecnico.
Nel seguito ne vengono enfatizzate alcune, in riferimento agli obbiettivi del presente documento.
Observe all the precautionary measures stated in the Technical Handbook’s Handbook Guide. Some of
them are expressly pointed out herebelow, with reference to the scopes of this document.
3.2 Manipolazione cavi – Cable handling
Le guide d’onda ed i cavi coassiali vanno manipolati con attenzione evitandone il piegamento eccessivo
che potrebbero danneggiarne la funzionalità.
Wave guides and coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which could
compromise their functionality.
3.3 ESD
Gli LO e TR contengono dispositivi sensibili alle cariche elettrostatiche, segnalati dal simbolo sotto
indicato. Per evitare danneggiamenti, osservare le precauzioni indicate nella ’Guida al Manuale’
(Handbook Guide) del Manuale Tecnico.
LOs and TRs contain devices sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed. To avoid damages, observe the precautionary measures stated in the Technical
Handbook’s Handbook Guide.
3.4 Parti meccaniche calde – Heat–radiating mechanical parts
Nel caso in cui, nelle configurazioni ODU 1+1 e 2+0, si operi per smontare un TR mentre l’altro è alimentato
e funzionante, occorre tenere presente che quest’ultimo contiene parti meccaniche calde, segnalate dal
simbolo sotto indicato. Per evitare scottature, osservare le precauzioni indicate nella ’Guida al Manuale’
(Handbook Guide) del Manuale Tecnico.
If, in the configurations ODU 1+1 and 2+0, you work to remove a TR while the other remains powered on
and working, you should be aware that this latter contains heat–radiating mechanical parts pointed out
by the following symbol. To avoid personal injury, observe the precautionary measures stated in the
Technical Handbook’s Handbook Guide.
3.5 Radiazioni microonde – Microwave radiations
Le radiazioni microonde possono compromettere la Vostra salute. Osservare le precauzioni indicate nella
’Guida al Manuale’ (Handbook Guide) del Manuale Tecnico.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Observe the precautionary measures stated in the
Technical Handbook’s Handbook Guide.
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 7 / 100
100
4 ATTREZZI NECESSARI – REQUIRED TOOLS
Sono necessari:
– gli attrezzi contenuti nella borsa di manutenzione (vedi la sezione ’Manutenzione’ del Manuale

Tecnico) ed in particolare i seguenti cavi:

• Cavo coassiale N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm, vedi Fig. 1.
• Cavo coassiale N RG223 – N 900 RG223, vedi Fig. 2.
– il Craft Terminal
The following tools are necessary:

– those contained in the Maintenance Tool Kit (see section ’Maintenance’ of Technical Handbook), in
particular the following cables:
• Coaxial cable N RG223 – N 90 0 RG223, see Fig. 1.
• Coaxial cable N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm, see Fig. 2.
– the Craft Terminal
LATO IDU LATO CONNETTORE TR

IDU SIDE TR CONNECTOR SIDE
Fig. 1. Cavo coassiale – Coaxial cable – N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm
LATO IDU LATO ODU

IDU SIDE ODU SIDE
Fig. 2. Cavo coassiale – Coaxial cable – N RG223 – N 900 RG223
N.B. Nelle procedure, si descrive l’utilizzo del cavo N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm, in quanto consente
l’alimentazione e la gestione software del TR prima del suo montaggio nell’ODU. In alternativa,
si può usare il cavo N RG223 – N 900 RG223 , dopo avere installato il TR nell’ODU e ricollegato
tutti i cavi interni dell’ODU.
N.B. In the procedures, the use of cable N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm is described, as it allows TR
powering and software management before its mounting into ODU. In alternative, you can use
the cable N RG223 – N 90 0 RG223 , after having installed TR into ODU and connected all ODU
internal cables.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 8 / 100
100
5 PARTI DI RICAMBIO – SPARE PARTS
5.1 Generalità – General

Le procedure presenti in questo documento presuppongono che nel Vostro laboratorio di manutenzione
siano disponibili, generalmente in alternativa:
– i Ricetrasmettitori (TR) e, separatamente, gli Oscillatori Locali (LO), cfr. punto a ) pag.10
– i complessi ’TR + LO’ già preassemblati e pretestati, cfr. punto b ) pag.11
– solo per ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0, i complessi ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ già preassemblati e
pretestati, cfr. punto c ) pag.12
In tutti i casi di sostituzione (di un TR, oppure di un LO, oppure di un complesso ’TR + LO’, oppure di un
complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’), occorre comunque accertarsi che i codici delle unità sostituite siano
esattamente uguali ai codici delle unità di scorta.
The procedures present in this document presume that in your Maintenance Center are available, usually
in alternative to each other:
– the Tranceivers (TR) and, separately, the Local Oscillators (LO), ref. point a ) pag.10
– the assemblies ’TR + LO’ already assembled and pre–tested, ref. point b ) pag.11
– only for ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0, the assemblies ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ already assembled and
pre–tested, ref. point c ) pag.12
In all replacement cases (of a TR, or a LO, or an assembly ’TR + LO’, or an assembly ’TR + LO + adapter
kits’), it is always necessary to ascertain that the P/Ns of the spare parts and those of the replaced parts
are exactly the same.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 9 / 100
100
a) Ricetrasmettitori (TR) e, separatamente, Oscillatori Locali (LO)
Tranceivers (TR) and, separately, Local Oscillators (LO)
I TR ed i LO hanno ciascuno un proprio codice.

I vari tipi di TR sono indicati nella seguente Tab. 5. :

Each TR and each LO has its own P/N.
The following Tab. 5. lists the various TR types :
Tab. 5. Tipi di TR singoli –Types of individual TRs

FREQUENZA
FIG. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–7–8 GHz Fig. 30. 71
11 GHz Fig. 33. 77
13–15 GHz Fig. 36. 83
18–23–25 GHz Fig. 39. 89
28–38 GHz Fig. 42. 95
I vari tipi di LO sono indicati nella seguente Tab. 6.

The following Tab. 6. lists the various LO types:
Tab. 6. Tipi di LO singoli –Types of individual LOs

FREQUENZA
FIG. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–11 GHz Fig. 3. 14
13–38 GHz Fig. 4. 15
Il codice dei TR singoli e LO singoli sono presenti nel campo (P) delle suddette figure.
Sui TR sono inoltre montati dei kit adattatori che dipendono dalla frequenza e dal tipo di ODU:
• ODU 1+0 COMP
• ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0
Nelle procedure presenti in questo documento, quando si sostituisce un TR, si indica come
recuperare tali kit adattatori dal TR sostituito.
The P/N of an individual TR and LO is present in the field (P) of above mentioned figures.
Moreover, specific adapter kits are mounted on TRs, depending on frequency and ODU type:
• ODU 1+0 COMP
• ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0
When a TR must be replaced, the procedures present in this document explain how to recover such
adapters from the replaced TR.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 10 / 100
100
b) Complessi ’TR + LO’
Assemblies ’TR + LO’
I vari tipi di complessi ’TR+LO’ sono indicati nella seguente Tab. 7.

Non esiste un codice complessivo di complesso ’TR + LO’.

A whole P/N for a ’TR + LO’ assembly does not exist.

The following Tab. 7. lists the various ’TR+LO’ assembly types :
Tab. 7. Tipi di TR + LO – Types of TRs + LOs

FREQUENZA
FIG. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–7–8 GHz Fig. 23. 55
11 GHz Fig. 25. 59
13–15 GHz Fig. 26. 62
18–23–25 GHz Fig. 27. 65
28–38 GHz Fig. 29. 69
Sui TR sono inoltre montati dei kit adattatori che dipendono dalla frequenza e dal tipo di ODU:
• ODU 1+0 COMP
• ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0
Nelle procedure presenti in questo documento, quando si sostituisce un TR, si indica come
recuperare tali kit adattatori dal TR sostituito.
Moreover, specific adapter kits are mounted on TRs, depending on frequency and ODU type:
• ODU 1+0 COMP
• ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0
When a TR must be replaced, the procedures present in this document explain how to recover such
adapters from the replaced TR.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 11 / 100
100
c) Complessi ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’
Assemblies ’TR + LO + adapter kits’
Solo per ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0.

Nel caso in cui nel Vostro laboratorio di manutenzione siano disponibili come parti di scorta dei

complessi ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ già pretestati, le procedure di sostituzione diventano molto più
semplici.
NOTA SULLA FREQUENZA DI TARATURA DEL TR:
Quando si utilizza un complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ disponibile a scorta per il suo
montaggio nell’ODU sul palo d’antenna, bisogna essere certi che la sua frequenza di
taratura sia uguale a quella del ricetrasmettitore sostituito, per evitare che, all’accensione,
venga trasmessa una frequenza impropria. Se non si è certi del valore della frequenza, si
esegua preventivamente il controllo indicato nel passo ’Controllo/taratura frequenza’
della procedura di sostituzione LO (cfr.Tab. 3. pag.6) scegliendo quella congruente con la
gamma di frequenza.
Non esiste un codice complessivo di ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’.
I vari tipi di complessi ’TR+LO + kIt adattatori’ sono indicati nella seguente Tab. 8.
Only for ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0.

In the case assemblies ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ already assembled and pre–tested are available in
your Maintenance Center, the replacement procedures are simpler than in the previous cases.
NOTE ON TR FREQUENCY CALIBRATION:
Whenever you use an assembly ’TR + LO + adapter kits’, available in the spare part stock,
for its mounting into ODU on the antenna pole, you must be sure that its calibration
frequency is equal to that of the replaced tranceiver, to avoid an improper frequency value
transmission at powering on. If you are not sure of frequency value, perform previously the
operations described in step ’Frequency check/adjustment’ of LO replacement
procedure (ref. Tab. 3. pag.6) choosing that consistent with the frequency range.
A whole P/N for a ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ assembly does not exist.
The following Tab. 8. lists the various ’TR+LO+adapter kits’ assembly types :
Tab. 8. Tipi di TR + LO + kit adattatori – Types of TRs + LOs + adapter kits

FREQUENZA
ODU FIG. PAG.
FREQUENCY
6–7–8 GHz 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0 Fig. 32. 75
11 GHz 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0 Fig. 35. 81
13–15 GHz 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0 Fig. 38. 87
18–23–25 GHz 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0 Fig. 41. 93
28–38 GHz 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0 Fig. 44. 99
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 12 / 100
100
5.2 Tipi di LO – LO types
Esistono due tipi fondamentali di LO illustrati nelle seguenti Fig. 3. (LO 6–11 GHz) pag.14 e Fig. 4. (LO
13–38 GHz) pag.15.
Gli LO si contraddistinguono inoltre per la specifica frequenza di funzionamento. Ad ogni frequenza

corrisponde uno specifico codice indicato nel campo (P) delle suddette figure.
Un LO guasto deve essere sostituito esclusivamente con un LO avente lo stesso codice.
Il LO è fissato al TR mediante 4 viti nelle posizioni (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4).
I cavi illustrati nelle suddette figure sono parti integranti del LO (sono presenti anche sulle parti di scorta)
e non vanno mai smontati dal complesso.
Nelle procedure illustrate in questo documento, il LO viene smontato dal TR mantenendo:
– due cavi nelle posizioni (H1) (H2) , nel caso degli LO 6–11 GHz (Fig. 3. pag.14)
– un cavo nella posizione (H) , nel caso degli LO 13–38 GHz (Fig. 4. pag.15)
cavi che vengono recuperati e montati sul nuovo LO, prima del montaggio del nuovo LO sul TR.
There are two LO main types, depicted in following Fig. 3. (LO 6–11 GHz) pag.14 and Fig. 4. (LO 13–38
GHz) pag.15.
LOs are also different from each other as far as the operating frequency is concerned. A specific P/N in
the field (P) of above mentioned figures corresponds to a specific frequency.
A faulty LO must be replaced only with a LO having the same P/N.
The LO is fixed on the TR through 4 screws in positions (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4).
Cables shown in above mentioned figures strictly belong to the LO (they are present on the spare parts,
too) and must never be removed from the LO assembly.
In the procedures of this document, the LO is removed from the TR keeping:
– two cables in positions (H1) (H2) , for LOs 6–11 GHz (Fig. 3. pag.14)
– one cable in position (H) , for LOs 13–38 GHz (Fig. 4. pag.15)
cables that are recovered and inserted on the new LO, before mounting the new LO on the TR.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 13 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
(474.210.139 HDZZQ_01)
G4
G1
H1
P
H2
Fig. 3. LO 6–11 GHz
100
G2
G3
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ

14 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
G4
(474.230.252 HDZZQ_02)
G1
H
Fig. 4. LO 13–38 GHz
100
G2
G3

15 / 100
6 CONFIGURAZIONI DI SISTEMA – SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
Questo capitolo riassume i layout di impianto IDU–ODU nelle varie configurazioni di sistema previsti. Per
ulteriori dettagli, si faccia riferimento al Manuale Tecnico specifico.

This chapter sums up the IDU–ODU station layouts for the envisaged system configurations. For further
information please refer to the specific Technical Handbook.
COMPACT ODU
RT–0
IDU/REG CH–0
SAM + RMD–0 PSU 0
N.B. Per disalimentare:

– CH–0, spegnere PSU–0
N.B. To switch off power supply for:

– CH–0, switch off PSU–0
Fig. 5. UHRC–UHDC
ODU 1+0 EXP. / 1+1 / 2+0
RT–0
CH–0
RT–1
IDU/REG CH–1
PSU 0
plug TX0 presente in alcune
RMD–0 N.B.1 configurazioni (N.B.2)
RMD–1 PSU 1
TX0 plug present in some
configurations (N.B.2)
N.B.1 Per disalimentare:

N.B.2 Il plug di indirizzamento TX0 su RT–0:
– è presente nelle configurazioni ODU ’Co–Polare’ e ’Doppia Polarizzazione senza XPIC’
– non è presente nelle configurazioni ODU ’HST’ e ’Doppia Polarizzazione con XPIC’
N.B.1 To switch off power supply for:

N.B.2 The TX0 addressing plug on RT–0:
– is present in the ’Co–Polar’ and ’Double Polar without XPIC’ ODU configurations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– is not present in the ’HST’ and ’Double Polar with XPIC’ ODU configurations
Fig. 6. UHR–UHD con with 1 x ODU ’1+1/2+0’
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 16 / 100
100
COMPACT ODU 0
RT–0
CH–0
COMPACT ODU 1
RT–0
CH–1
IDU/REG plug TX0 presente
TX0 plug present
PSU 0
RMD–0 N.B.
RMD–1 PSU 1
N.B. Per disalimentare:

N.B. To switch off power supply for:

Fig. 7. UHR – UHD con with 2 x ODU ’1+0 COMP’

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 17 / 100
100
ODU 0

RT–0
CH–0
RT–1
ÉÉÉÉÉ
IDU/REG CH–1
RMD–0
ÉÉÉÉÉPSU 0
RMD–1 PSU 1 plug TX0 presente in alcune
N.B.1 configurazioni (N.B.2)
PSU 2 TX0 plug present in some
RMD–2
configurations (N.B.2)
RMD–3 PSU 3
ODU 1
RT–0
CH–2
RT–1
CH–3

N.B.2 Il plug di indirizzamento TX0 su RT–0:
– è presente nelle configurazioni ODU ’Co–Polare’ e ’Doppia Polarizzazione senza XPIC’
– non è presente nelle configurazioni ODU ’Doppia Polarizzazione con XPIC’

N.B.2 The TX0 addressing plug on RT–0:
– is present in the ’Co–Polar and Double Polar without XPIC’ ODU configurations
– is not present in the ’Double Polar with XPIC’ ODU configurations
Fig. 8. UHRN con with 2 x ODU ’1+1/2+0’

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 18 / 100
100
COMPACT ODU 0
RT–0
CH–0
COMPACT ODU 1
RT–0
ÉÉÉÉ
IDU/REG CH–1
RMD–0 ÉÉÉÉ PSU 0

RMD–1 PSU 1
N.B.1 plug TX0 presente
PSU 2 TX0 plug present
RMD–2
RMD–3 PSU 3
COMPACT ODU 2
RT–0
CH–2
COMPACT ODU 3
RT–0
CH–3

N.B.2 Questa configurazione non è prevista nel Product Release 1.0 9600USY/UHRN. Dovrebbe
essere disponibile nel Product Release 2.0 9600USY/UHRN (fare riferimento al Manuale
Tecnico 9600USY/UHRN Rel.2.0).

N.B.2 This configuration is not envisaged in 9600USY/UHRN Product Release 1.0. It should be
available with 9600USY/UHRN Product Release 2.0 (make reference to 9600USY/UHRN
Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook).
Fig. 9. UHRN con with 4 x ODU ’1+0 COMP’

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 19 / 100
100
PROC.A pg.1/7
PROC. A : ODU 1+0 COMP

Procedura per interventi su ODU 1+0 Compatto
Procedure for interventions on ODU 1+0 Compact
A.1 Premessa – Foreword
Prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione, leggere i capitoli qui di seguito indicati:

Before doing anything, please read chapters indicated herebelow:
CAPITOLO TITOLO
PAG.
CHAPTER TITLE
A.2 Apertura ODU – ODU opening
1) Su IDU, spegnere l’alimentatore corrispondente al Ricetrasmettitore su cui si deve intervenire

(cfr. cap.6 pag.16)
On IDU, switch off the power supply unit corresponding to the Tranceiver for which intervention
is required (see chapt.6 pag.16)
2) Scollegare il cavo IDU–ODU dal lato ODU

Disconnect IDU–ODU cable at ODU side
3) Smontare l’ODU dal palo d’antenna (cfr. Manuale di Installazione) e portarlo nel laboratorio di
manutenzione.
Dismount ODU from antenna pole (see Installation Handbook) and carry it to the maintenance
center.
4) Apertura ODU – ODU opening
Posizionare l’ODU come indicato in Fig. 10. pag.21, svitare tutte le viti che fissano il coperchio
e rimuovere il coperchio.
Riporre ordinatamente il coperchio e le viti per il successivo rimontaggio.
Position ODU as shown in Fig. 10. pag.21, turn off all screws fixing the cover and remove cover.
Store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 20 / 100
100
PROC.A pg.2/7
(8BW 00560 0000 BDZZQ_04 4/4)
Fig. 10. ODU 1+0 COMP: apertura/chiusura –

ODU 1+0 COMP: opening/closing
A.3 Scelta del prossimo passo – Choice of next step
La procedura prosegue in base all’operazione da svolgere:

• sostituzione LO: eseguire il seguente passo A.4 pag.22
• sostituzione TR: eseguire il seguente passo A.5 pag.22.
The procedure continuation depends on the operation to be done:

• LO replacement: execute next step A.4 pag.22
• TR replacement: execute next step A.5 pag.22.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 21 / 100
100
PROC.A pg.3/7
A.4 Sostituzione LO – LO replacement

Non è necessario smontare il TR !

A seconda della frequenza, eseguire la procedura indicata nella Tab. 3. pag.6.
Al termine, eseguire il successivo passo A.6 pag.26.
TR dismount is not necessary !

According to frequency, execute procedure stated in Tab. 3. pag.6.
At the end, perform next step A.6 pag.26.
A.5 Sostituzione TR – TR replacement
5) Scollegamento TR da sostituire – Disconnection of TR to be replaced
La Fig. 11. pag.23 illustra un esempio di ODU 1+0 COMP aperto.

N.B. Per una completa panoramica del layout degli ODU 1+0 COMP in funzione della
frequenza, riferirsi alle figure incluse nelle procedure di sostituzione TR (procedure
elencate in Tab. 4. pag.6).
Occorre rimuovere le guide d’onda (A) e (B) , oppure i corrispondenti cavi coassiali.
N.B. Da 11 GHz (incluso) in su sono presenti le guide d’onda. Per le frequenze
inferiori sono presenti i cavi coassiali. La Fig. 11. rappresenta la configurazione
con guide d’onda (i cavi coassiali sono in posizione analoga).
Per ciascuna delle due guide d’onda:
• svitare le quattro viti sulle due flange della guida d’onda
• rimuovere la guida d’onda, evitandone la deformazione
• riporre ordinatamente la guida d’onda e le sue 8 viti per il successivo rimontaggio.
Per ciascuno dei due cavi coassiali:
• svitare entrambi i connettori (maschi SMA)
• rimuovere il cavo, evitandone la deformazione
• riporre ordinatamente il cavo per il successivo rimontaggio.
– svitare il connettore BNC (C) ed estrarre il connettore (D)
Fig. 11. pag.23 shows an example of an open ODU 1+0 COMP.

N.B. For an outline of all possible layouts of ODU 1+0 COMP according to frequencies,
please make reference to figures included in the TR replacing procedures (listed in
Tab. 4. pag.6).
The wave guides (A) e (B) , or the correspondent coaxial cables, mus be removed.
N.B. Wave guides are equipped from 11 GHz (included) up. Coaxial cables are
equipped in the cases of lower frequencies. Fig. 11. shows the wave–guides
configuration (coaxial cables, if equipped instead, are in the same position).
For each one of the 2 wave guides:
• turn off the 4 screws on each of the two flanges
• remove the wave guide, avoiding its deformation
• store tidily the wave guide and its 8 screws for successive mounting.
For each one of the 2 coaxial cables:
• untighten both connectors (SMA males)
• remove the cable, avoiding its deformation
• store tidily the cable for successive mounting.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– untighten BNC connector (C) and pull out connector (D)
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 22 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
(8BW 00560 0000 BDZZQ_04 3/4)

PROC.A pg.4/7
ODU 1+0 COMP: TR disconnection/connection
100
E
Fig. 11. ODU 1+0 COMP: scollegamento/collegamento TR –

D
D
B
23 / 100
PROC.A pg.5/7
6) Sbloccaggio/estrazione TR da sostituire – Unblocking/extraction of TR to be replaced

Svitare le 4 viti indicate in Fig. 12. ed estrarre il TR.
Riporre ordinatamente le viti, le rosette e gli O–ring per il successivo rimontaggio.
Turn off 4 screws shown in Fig. 12. and extract TR.

Store tidily screws, washers and O–rings for successive mounting.
1
4
2 3 (8BW 00560 0000 BDZZQ_04 1/4)
Fig. 12. ODU 1+0 COMP: sbloccaggio/bloccaggio TR –

ODU 1+0 COMP: TR unblocking/blocking
7) Eventuale disconnessione plug TX0 – Eventual plug TX0 disconnection
Se presente, rimuovere il plug (E) mostrato in Fig. 11. pag.23 e riporlo ordinatamente per il
successivo rimontaggio (vedi cap.6 pag.16 per dettagli sull’uso del plug).
If present, remove plug (E) shown in Fig. 11. pag.23 and store it tidily for successive mounting
(see chapt.6 pag.16 for details about plug usage).
8) Preparazione del TR di scorta – Spare TR preparation

N.B. Con tale procedura si smonta il kit adattatore dal TR guasto e lo si inserisce nel TR
di scorta. Inoltre, se il TR di scorta non ha già montato il LO, si smonta il LO dal TR
guasto e lo si inserisce nel TR di scorta.

N.B. With this procedure, the adapter kit is removed from the faulty TR and is inserted in
the spare TR. Furthermore, if the LO is not yet mounted on the spare TR, the LO is
removed from the faulty TR and is mounted on the spare TR.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 24 / 100
100
PROC.A pg.6/7
9) Eventuale riconnessione plug TX0 – Eventual plug TX0 reconnection

Se era stato disconnesso dal TR rimosso (cfr. passo 7 ) pag.24), inserire sul TR di scorta il plug
TX0 nella posizione (E) di Fig. 11. pag.23.
If it was disconnected from removed TR (see step 7 ) pag.24), insert on spare TR the plug TX0
into position (E) of Fig. 11. pag.23.
10 ) Inserire il TR di scorta (completo di LO, kit adattatori e, se previsto, il plug TX0) nell’ODU
Insert spare TR (equipped with LO, adapter kits and, if envisaged, plug TX0) into ODU
11 ) Avvitare le 4 viti, con i relativi O–ring e rosette, indicate in Fig. 12.

Turn 4 screws, with relative O–rings and washers, shown in Fig. 12.
12 ) Collegamento TR – TR connection
Fig. 11. pag.23

Sequenzialmente:
– avvitare il connettore BNC (C)
N.B. Momento di serraggio 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg.cm)
– inserire il connettore (D)
– collegare le guide d’onda (A) e (B) , oppure i corrispondenti cavi coassiali:
• per ciascuna delle due guide d’onda:
– appoggiare su una delle due flange ed avvitare le 4 viti, evitando la
deformazione della guida d’onda
– eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altra flangia, evitando la deformazione della
guida d’onda
• per ciascuno dei due cavi coassiali:
– avvitare il connettore da un lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo
– eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altro lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo.
Fig. 11. pag.23

In sequence:
– tighten connector BNC (C)
N.B. Tightening torque 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg .cm)
– insert connector (D)
– connect wave guides (A) e (B) , or the correspondent coaxial cables:
• for each one of the 2 wave guides:
– lean one flange and turn its 4 screws, avoiding the wave guide deformation
– carry out the same on the other flange, avoiding the wave guide deformation
• for each one of the 2 coaxial cables:
– tighten the connector at one side, avoiding the cable deformation
– carry out the same on the other side, avoiding the cable deformation
13 ) Eseguire il successivo passo A.6 pag.26.

Execute next step A.6 pag.26.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 25 / 100
100
PROC.A pg.7/7

A.6 Reinstallazione ODU – ODU reinstallation

14 ) Chiusura ODU – ODU closing
Fig. 10. pag.21.

Inserire il coperchio e fissarlo con le viti precedentemente rimosse.
Fig. 10. pag.21.

Insert cover and fix it with the screws previously removed.
15 ) Montare l’ODU sul palo d’antenna (cfr. Manuale di Installazione).

Mount ODU on antenna pole (see Installation Handbook) .
16 ) Ricollegare il cavo IDU–ODU dal lato ODU.

Connect again IDU–ODU cable at ODU side.
17 ) Accendere l’alimentatore su IDU che era stato spento nel passo 1 ) pag.20.
Switch on power supply on IDU that was switched off in step 1 ) pag.20.
18 ) Eseguire i controlli funzionali.

Perform functional checks.
FINE PROC.A – END PROC.A

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 26 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.1/18
PROC. B : ODU 1+1/2+0

Procedura per interventi su ODU 1+1, 2+0 con o senza opzione XPIC
Procedure for interventions on ODU 1+1, 2+0 with or without XPIC option
B.1 Premessa – Foreword

CAPITOLO TITOLO
PAG.
CHAPTER TITLE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 27 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.2/18

B.2 Apertura ODU – ODU opening

1) Su IDU, spegnere l’alimentatore corrispondente al Ricetrasmettitore su cui si deve intervenire
(cfr. cap.6 pag.16)
On IDU, switch off the power supply unit corresponding to the Tranceiver for which intervention
is required (see chapt.6 pag.16)
2) Scollegare il cavo IDU–ODU dal lato ODU (Fig. 13. )

Disconnect IDU–ODU cable at ODU side (Fig. 13. )
N.B. Avendo spento l’alimentazione su IDU, questa operazione non è strettamente

necessaria. Viene suggerita esclusivamente come ulteriore cautela.
N.B. Having powered off IDU, this operation is not strictly necessary. It is suggested just
as a further caution.
CAVO IF
IDU–ODU
PER TR 0
IF CABLE CAVO IF IF CABLE

IDU–ODU IDU–ODU IDU–ODU
FOR TR 0 PER TR 1 FOR TR 1
Fig. 13. Scollegamento cavo IDU–ODU

IDU–ODU cable disconnection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 28 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.3/18
3) Sbloccaggio coperchio ODU – ODU cover unblocking

Fig. 14.
Sbloccare, una alla volta, le leve di bloccaggio del coperchio (B) e (C) premendo la molla di
ritegno (D) verso l’alto e, contemporaneamente, ruotando la leva (E) verso il basso.
Fig. 14.
One at a time, unblock the cover blocking levers (B) and (C) pushing up the restraint spring (D)
and, contemporarily, turning down the lever (E).
B C (8BW 00560 0008 BDZZQ 2/6)
Fig. 14. Sbloccaggio/bloccaggio coperchio ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0 –

ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1, 2+0 cover unblocking/blocking
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 29 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.4/18
4) Apertura coperchio ODU – ODU cover open

Fig. 15.
N.B. Tenere conto che lo schermo solare , se presente (cfr. (A) nella Fig. 14. pag.29), è
solidale col coperchio.
Fig. 15.
N.B. Take into account that solar shield, if present (see (A) in Fig. 14. pag.29), is fixed on
the cover.
APERTURA CHIUSURA
OPENING CLOSING
(8BW 00560 0003 BDZZQ)
Fig. 15. Apertura/chiusura ODU –

ODU opening/closing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 30 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.5/18
B.3 Estrazione TR – TR extraction

5) Rimozione guide d’onda o cavi coassiali RF – Remotion of wave guides or RF coaxial cables
Fig. 16. pag.32

N.B. Da 18 GHz (incluso) in su sono presenti le guide d’onda. Per le frequenze inferiori
sono presenti i cavi coassiali. La Fig. 16. rappresenta la configurazione con guide
d’onda (i cavi coassiali sono in posizione analoga).
Occorre intervenire su:
– guide d’onda (A) e (B) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali), se TR 0
– guide d’onda (C) e (D) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali), se TR 1
– svitare le quattro viti sulle due flange della guida d’onda
– rimuovere la guida d’onda, evitandone la deformazione
– riporre ordinatamente la guida d’onda e le sue 8 viti per il successivo rimontaggio.
– svitare entrambi i connettori (maschi SMA)
– rimuovere il cavo, evitandone la deformazione
– riporre ordinatamente il cavo per il successivo rimontaggio.
Fig. 16. pag.32

N.B. Wave guides are equipped from 18 GHz (included) up. Coaxial cables are equipped
in the cases of lower frequencies. Fig. 16. shows the wave–guides configuration
(coaxial cables, if equipped instead, are in the same position).
You must work on:
– wave guides (A) and (B) (or correspondent coaxial cables), if TR 0
– wave guides (C) and (D) (or correspondent coaxial cables), if TR 1
– turn off the 4 screws on each of the two flanges
– remove the wave guide, avoiding its deformation
– store tidily the wave guide and its 8 screws for successive mounting.
– utighten both connectors (SMA males)
– remove the cable, avoiding its deformation
– store tidily the cable for successive mounting.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 31 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
TR 0
C
PROC.B pg.6/18
Wave guide remotion

Fig. 16. Rimozione guide d’onda –
100
D

B
TR 1
(8BW 00560 0003 BDZZQ)
32 / 100
PROC.B pg.7/18
6) Scelta del prossimo passo – Choice of next step

La procedura prosegue in base alla presenza dell’opzione XPIC:

– opzione XPIC montata: eseguire il seguente passo 7 )
– opzione XPIC non montata: eseguire il seguente passo 8 ) pag.38
The procedure continuation depends on the XPIC option presence:

– XPIC option mounted: execute next step 7 )
– XPIC option not mounted: execute next step 8 ) pag.38
7) Rimozione collegamenti XPIC – XPIC connections remotion
Occorre rimuovere i seguenti cavi coassiali:

– (A1) e (A2) , se TR 0
– (B1) e (B2) , se TR 1
facendo riferimento:
– per 6–8 GHz, alla Fig. 17. pag.34
– per 11 GHz, alla Fig. 18. pag.35
– per 18–23–25 GHz, alla Fig. 20. pag.37.
ed evitando la deformazione dei cavi
Al termine eseguire il seguente passo 8 ) pag.38
The following coaxial cables must be removed:

– (A1) and (A2) , if TR 0
– (B1) and (B2) , if TR 1
with reference:
– for 6–8 GHz, to Fig. 17. pag.34
– for 11 GHz, to Fig. 18. pag.35
– for 18–23–25 GHz, to Fig. 20. pag.37.
and avoiding the cable deformation
At the end, perform next step 8 ) pag.38
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 33 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
(8BW 03096 0001 BDZZQ_01)
PROC.B pg.8/18
Fig. 17. ODU–XPIC 6–8 GHz

B1
A1
100
B2
TR 0
A2
TR 1
34 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
(8BW 03097 0001 BDZZQ_01)
PROC.B pg.9/18
Fig. 18. ODU–XPIC 11 GHz
100
A1
B1

TR 0
A2
TR 1
B2
35 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
(8BW 03098 0001 BDZZQ_01)
PROC.B pg.10/18
Fig. 19. ODU–XPIC 13–15 GHz

B1
100
A1

B2
TR 0
A2
TR 1
36 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
(8BW 03059 0001 BDZZQ_01)
A1
B1
PROC.B pg.11/18
Fig. 20. ODU–XPIC 18–23–25 GHz
100
B2
A2
TR 0
TR 1
37 / 100
PROC.B pg.12/18
8) Disconnessione altri cavi – Disconnection of other cables

Fig. 21.
Disconnettere dal ricetrasmettitore i seguenti connettori:
– se TR0: (A1) (A2) e, se presente, il plug (A3) (N.B.)
– se TR1: (B1) (B2)
N.B. Il plug (A3) è presente solo nelle configurazioni 1+1 HET e 2+0 e serve per
distinguere il TR0. Non è mai presente sul TR1.
– se rimosso, riporre ordinatamente il plug (A3) per il successivo rimontaggio.
Fig. 21.
Disconnect the following connectors from the tranceiver:
– if TR0: (A1) (A2) and, if present, the plug (A3) (N.B.)
– if TR1: (B1) (B2)
N.B. Plug (A3) is present in the configurations 1+1 HET and 2+0 only; it is used to
characterize TR0. It is never present on TR1.
– if removed, store tidily the plug (A3) for successive mounting.
A3
TR 0
A2
A1
TR 1
B2
B1
Fig. 21. Disconnessione altri cavi –
Disconnection of other cables
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 38 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.13/18
9) Sbloccaggio ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver unblocking

Fig. 22.
Svitare e rimuovere:
– le viti laterali (A1) e (A2) e le viti frontali (A3) e (A4) , se TR0
– le viti laterali (B1) e (B2) e le viti frontali (B3) e (B4) , se TR1
Riporre ordinatamente le viti per il successivo rimontaggio.
Fig. 22.
Turn off and remove:
– side screws (A1) and (A2) and front screws (A3) and (A4) , if TR0
– side screws (B1) and (B2) and front screws (B3) and (B4) , if TR1
Store tidily the screws for successive mounting.
TR 0
A2
A1
A4
A3
B2
TR 1
B1
B4
B3
Fig. 22. Sbloccaggio e rimozione TR –

TR unblocking and remotion
10 ) Rimozione ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver remotion
Il ricetrasmettitore può ora essere rimosso.
Now the tranceiver can be removed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 39 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.14/18
B.4 Scelta del prossimo passo – Choice of next step

La procedura prosegue in base all’eventuale disponibilità di un complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’
come parte di ricambio (cfr. punto c ) pag.12):
• complesso non disponibile: in questo caso si esegua il successivo passo B.5 pag.40
• complesso disponibile: in questo caso si proceda saltando direttamente al passo B.10 pag.41
(inserendo il complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ di scorta), sino al termine della procedura.
Dopo avere riattivato il ricetrasmettitore, sarà poi necessario effettuare la riparazione del
complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ rimosso, come indicato nel punto B.15 pag.44.
The procedure goes on according to the possible availability, as spare part, of an assembly ’TR +
LO + adapter kits’ (see point c ) pag.12):
• unavailable assembly: carry out next step B.5 pag.40
• available assembly: jump directly to step B.10 pag.41 (inserting the spare assembly ’TR + LO
+ adapter kits’), and proceed step by step to the procedure end.
After having reactivating the tranceiver, proceed to repair the removed assembly ’TR + LO +
adapter kits’as stated in step B.15 pag.44.
B.5 Chiusura ODU e proseguimento riparazione –

ODU closing and repair going on
11 ) Chiudere il coperchio dell’ODU (Fig. 15. pag.30)

Close ODU cover (Fig. 15. pag.30)
12 ) Bloccare il coperchio posizionando le due leve come nel particolare (C) della Fig. 14. pag.29
Block cover, setting both levers as in detail (C) of Fig. 14. pag.29
13 ) Portare il ricetrasmettitore laboratorio di manutenzione

Carry the tranceiver to the maintenance center.
14 ) Eseguire il prossimo passo B.6 pag.40

Carry out next step B.6 pag.40
B.6 Scelta del prossimo passo – Choice of next step

• sostituzione LO: eseguire il seguente passo B.7 pag.41
• sostituzione TR: eseguire il seguente passo B.8 pag.41

• LO replacement: execute next step B.7 pag.41
• TR replacement: execute next step B.8 pag.41
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 40 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.15/18
B.7 Sostituzione LO – LO replacement


Al termine, eseguire il successivo passo B.9

At the end, perform next step B.9
B.8 Sostituzione TR – TR replacement
Preparazione del TR di scorta – Spare TR preparation

Al termine, eseguire il successivo passo B.9

At the end, perform next step B.9
B.9 Riapertura ODU – ODU reopen
Riaprire l’ODU: cfr. punti 3 ) pag.29 e 4 ) pag.30
Reopen ODU: see points 3 ) pag.29 and 4 ) pag.30
B.10 Reinserimento TR – TR reinsertion
Fig. 22. pag.39 :
15 ) Inserire il TR (completo di LO e kit adattatori) nell’ODU

Insert TR (inclusive of LO and adapter kits) into ODU
16 ) Bloccaggio ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver blocking
Inserire ed avvitare:
– le viti laterali (A1) e (A2) e le viti frontali (A3) e (A4) , se TR0
– le viti laterali (B1) e (B2) e le viti frontali (B3) e (B4) , se TR1
Insert and turn:

– side screws (A1) and (A2) and front screws (A3) and (A4) , if TR0
– side screws (B1) and (B2) and front screws (B3) and (B4) , if TR1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 41 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.16/18
B.11 Collegamento TR (a) – TR connection (a)

Fig. 21. pag.38 :
Connettere al ricetrasmettitore i seguenti connettori:

– se TR0: (A1) (A2) e, se precedentemente rimosso, il plug (A3)
– se TR1: (B1) (B2)
N.B. Per connettori avvitati: momento di serraggio 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg.cm)
Connect the following connectors to the tranceiver:

– if TR0: (A1) (A2) and, if previously removed, the plug (A3)
– if TR1: (B1) (B2) and (B3)
N.B. Tightening torque for tightened connectors: 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg .cm)
B.12 Collegamento TR (b) se necessario– TR connection (b) if necessary
Solo nel caso di opzione XPIC montata, facendo riferimento:

– per 11 GHz, alla Fig. 18. pag.35
– per 18–23–25 GHz, alla Fig. 20. pag.37.
occorre ricollegare i seguenti cavi coassiali :
– (A1) e (A2) , se TR 0
– (B1) e (B2) , se TR 1
evitando la deformazione dei cavi
Only in the case of XPIC option mounted, and making reference:

– for 11 GHz, to Fig. 18. pag.35
– for 18–23–25 GHz, to Fig. 20. pag.37.
the following coaxial cables must be connected:
– (A1) and (A2) , if TR 0
– (B1) and (B2) , if TR 1
avoiding the cable deformation
N.B. Tightening torque: 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg .cm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 42 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.17/18
B.13 Collegamento TR (c) – TR connection (c)

Fig. 16. pag.32 :
Collegamento guide d’onda o cavi coassiali RF

Occorre ricollegare:
– le guide d’onda (A) e (B) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali), se TR 0
– le guide d’onda (C) e (D) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali), se TR 1
• Per ciascuna delle due guide d’onda:
– appoggiare su una delle due flange ed avvitare le 4 viti, evitando la
deformazione della guida d’onda
– eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altra flangia, evitando la deformazione della
guida d’onda
• Per ciascuno dei due cavi coassiali:
– avvitare il connettore da un lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo
– eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altro lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo.
Fig. 16. pag.32 :
Connection of wave guides or RF coaxial cables

You must connect:
– wave guides (A) and (B) (or correspondent coaxial cables), if TR 0
– wave guides (C) and (D) (or correspondent coaxial cables), if TR 1
• For each one of the 2 wave guides:
– lean one flange and turn its 4 screws, avoiding the wave guide deformation
– carry out the same on the other flange, avoiding the wave guide deformation
• For each one of the 2 coaxial cables:
– tighten the connector at one side, avoiding the cable deformation
– carry out the same on the other side, avoiding the cable deformation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 43 / 100
100
PROC.B pg.18/18
B.14 Riattivazione TR – TR reactivation

19 ) Ricollegare il cavo IDU–ODU dal lato ODU (Fig. 13. pag.28)

Connect again IDU–ODU cable at ODU side (Fig. 13. pag.28)
N.B. Operazione necessaria solo se il cavo era stato scollegato (cfr.punto 2 ) pag.28)
N.B. Operation necessary only if cable was disconnected (see point 2 ) pag.28)
20 ) Riaccendere l’alimentatore su IDU che era stato spento nel punto 1 ) pag.28.
Switch on power supply on IDU that was switched off in point 1 ) pag.28.

B.15 Riparazione complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’

’TR + LO + adapter kits’ assembly repair
Questa fase riguarda il caso in cui, dal passo B.4 pag.40 si sia passati direttamente al passo B.10
pag.41, eseguendo la sostituzione integrale con un complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ disponibile
come parte di ricambio. È ora necessario riparare il complesso rimosso eseguendo, in alternativa:
• il passo B.7 pag.41 (sostituzione LO)
• oppure il passo B.8 pag.41 (sostituzione TR)
Per verificare la funzionalità del complesso riparato si può:
• rieseguire l’intera procedura inserendo il complesso riparato nell’ODU in esercizio
• oppure, se nel laboratorio di manutenzione fossero disponibili un IDU ed un ODU, provare il
complesso riparato su questo sistema di prova.
This phase concerns the case when from step B.4 pag.40 you have jumped directly to step B.10
pag.41, carrying out the replacement using an assembly ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ available as whole
spare part. To repair the removed assembly, perform, in alternative:
• step B.7 pag.41 (LO replacement)
• or step B.8 pag.41 (TR replacement)
In order to check the repaired assembly functionality, you can:
• perform again the whole procedure, inserting the repaired assembly into the operating ODU
• or, whenever an IDU and ODU were available in your maintenance center, check the repaired
assembly through this test system.
FINE PROC.B – END PROC.B

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 44 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.1/8
PROC. C : ODU 1+0 EXP

Procedura per interventi su ODU 1+0 EXP
Procedure for interventions on ODU 1+0 EXP
C.1 Premessa – Foreword

CAPITOLO TITOLO
PAG.
CHAPTER TITLE
AVVERTENZA PER LE FIGURE – WARNING ABOUT FIGURES
Le figure referenziate in questa procedura sono riferite alla configurazione 1+1/2+0.

Tenere conto che nella configurazione 1+0 EXP esiste solo il TR1.
Figures referenced to in this procedure are relevant to 1+1/2+0 configuration.

Take into account that only TR1 exists in the 1+0 EXP configuration.
C.2 Scelta della procedura – Choice of procedure
La procedura dipende dall’eventuale disponibilità di un complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’ come

parte di ricambio (cfr. punto c ) pag.12):
• complesso non disponibile: in questo caso si esegua la procedura C.3 pag.46 (con smontaggio
dell’ODU dal palo d’antenna)
• complesso disponibile: in questo caso si esegua la procedura C.4 pag.51 (che non necessita
dello smontaggio dell’ODU dal palo d’antenna)
The procedure depends on the possible availability, as spare part, of an assembly ’TR + LO + adapter
kits’ (see point c ) pag.12):
• unavailable assembly: carry out procedure C.3 pag.46 (with ODU dismounting from antenna
pole)
• available assembly: carry out procedure C.4 pag.51 (which does not need ODU dismounting
from antenna pole)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 45 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.2/8
C.3 Procedura con smontaggio ODU dal palo d’antenna

Procedure with ODU dismounting from antenna pole

C.3.1 Apertura ODU – ODU opening
1) Su IDU, spegnere entrambi gli alimentatori previsti per l’alimentazione dei due Ricetrasmettitori
dell’ODU da smontare (cfr. cap.6 pag.16)
On IDU, switch off both power supply units corresponding to the Tranceivers of the ODU to be
dismounted (see chapt.6 pag.16)
2) Scollegare il/i cavo/i IDU–ODU dal lato ODU (Fig. 13. pag.28)
Disconnect IDU–ODU cable(s) at ODU side (Fig. 13. pag.28)
3) Smontare l’ODU dal palo d’antenna (cfr. Manuale di Installazione) e portarlo nel laboratorio di
manutenzione.
Dismount ODU from antenna pole (see Installation Handbook) and carry it to the maintenance
center.
Fig. 14. pag.29

Fig. 14. pag.29

Fig. 15. pag.30

Fig. 15. pag.30

the cover.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 46 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.3/8
C.3.2 Estrazione TR – TR extraction

6) Rimozione guide d’onda o cavi coassiali RF – Remotion of wave guides or RF coaxial cables
Fig. 16. pag.32

Occorre intervenire sulle guide d’onda (C) e (D) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali)
– svitare e rimuovere le quattro viti sulle due flange della guida d’onda
– rimuovere la guida d’onda, evitandone la deformazione
– riporre ordinatamente la guida d’onda e le sue 8 viti per il successivo rimontaggio.
– svitare entrambi i connettori (maschi SMA)
– rimuovere il cavo, evitandone la deformazione
– riporre ordinatamente il cavo per il successivo rimontaggio.
Fig. 16. pag.32

You must work on wave guides (C) and (D) (or correspondent coaxial cables)
– turn off and remove the 4 screws on each of the two flanges
– remove the wave guide, avoiding its deformation
– store tidily the wave guide and its 8 screws for successive mounting.
– utighten both connectors (SMA males)
– remove the cable, avoiding its deformation
– store tidily the cable for successive mounting.
7) Disconnessione altri cavi – Disconnection of other cables
Fig. 21. pag.38

Disconnettere dal ricetrasmettitore i connettori (B1) (B2)
Disconnect the connectors (B1) (B2) from the tranceiver
8) Sbloccaggio ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver unblocking
Fig. 22. pag.39

Svitare e rimuovere le viti laterali (B1) e (B2) e le viti frontali (B3) e (B4)
Turn off and remove side screws (B1) and (B2) and front screws (B3) and (B4)
9) Rimozione ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver remotion
Il ricetrasmettitore può ora essere rimosso.

Now the tranceiver can be removed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 47 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.4/8
C.3.3 Scelta del prossimo passo – Choice of next step

• sostituzione LO: eseguire il seguente passo C.3.4
• sostituzione TR: eseguire il seguente passo C.3.5

• LO replacement: execute next step C.3.4
• TR replacement: execute next step C.3.5
C.3.4 Sostituzione LO – LO replacement

Al termine, eseguire il successivo passo C.3.6

At the end, perform next step C.3.6
C.3.5 Sostituzione TR – TR replacement
Preparazione del TR di scorta – Spare TR preparation

Al termine, eseguire il successivo passo C.3.6

At the end, perform next step C.3.6
C.3.6 Reinserimento TR – TR reinsertion
Fig. 22. pag.39 :
10 ) Inserire il TR (completo di LO e kit adattatori) nell’ODU

Insert TR (inclusive of LO and adapter kits) into ODU
11 ) Bloccaggio ricetrasmettitore – Tranceiver blocking
Inserire ed avvitare le viti laterali (B1) e (B2) e le viti frontali (B3) e (B4)
Insert and turn side screws (B1) and (B2) and front screws (B3) and (B4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 48 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.5/8
C.3.7 Collegamento TR (a) – TR connection (a)

Fig. 21. pag.38 :
Connettere al ricetrasmettitore i connettori (B1) (B2)

N.B. Per connettori avvitati: momento di serraggio 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg.cm)
Connect to the tranceiver the connectors (B1) (B2)

N.B. Tightening torque for tightened connectors: 0.8–1.2 Nm (8.1–14.6 kg .cm)
C.3.8 Collegamento TR (b) – TR connection (b)
Fig. 16. pag.32 :
Collegamento guide d’onda o cavi coassiali RF

Occorre ricollegare le guide d’onda (C) e (D) (o corrispondenti cavi coassiali):
– Per ciascuna delle due guide d’onda:
• appoggiare su una delle due flange ed avvitare le 4 viti, evitando la deformazione
della guida d’onda
• eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altra flangia, evitando la deformazione della guida
d’onda
– Per ciascuno dei due cavi coassiali:
• avvitare il connettore da un lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo
• eseguire la stessa operazione sull’altro lato, evitando la deformazione del cavo.
Fig. 16. pag.32 :
Connection of wave guides or RF coaxial cables

You must connect wave guides (C) and (D) (or correspondent coaxial cables):
– For each one of the 2 wave guides:
• lean one flange and screw its 4 screws, avoiding the wave guide deformation
• carry out the same on the other flange, avoiding the wave guide deformation
– For each one of the 2 coaxial cables:
• tighten the connector at one side, avoiding the cable deformation
• carry out the same on the other side, avoiding the cable deformation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 49 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.6/8
C.3.9 Reinstallazione ODU – ODU reinstallation

14 ) Montare l’ODU sul palo d’antenna (cfr. Manuale di Installazione)

Mount ODU on antenna pole (see Installation Handbook) .
15 ) Ricollegare il cavo IDU–ODU dal lato ODU

Connect again IDU–ODU cable at ODU side.
16 ) Su IDU, accendere entrambi gli alimentatori che erano stati spenti nel passo 1 ) pag.46.
On IDU, switch on both power supply units that had been switched off in step 1 ) pag.46.

FINE PROC.C – END PROC.C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 50 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.7/8
C.4 Procedura senza smontaggio ODU dal palo d’antenna

Procedure without ODU dismounting from antenna pole

C.4.1 Apertura ODU – ODU opening
1) Spegnere entrambi gli alimentatori su IDU

Switch off both power supply units of IDU
Fig. 14. pag.29

Fig. 14. pag.29

Fig. 15. pag.30

Fig. 15. pag.30

the cover.
C.4.2 Estrazione TR – TR extraction
Eseguire tutti i passi del par.C.3.2 pag.47
Perform all steps of para.C.3.2 pag.47
C.4.3 Reinserimento TR – TR reinsertion
Eseguire tutti i passi del par.C.3.6 pag.48, utilizzando il complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’
disponibile come parte di ricambio.
Perform all steps of para.C.3.6 pag.48, using the assembly ’TR + LO + adapter kits’ available as
whole spare part.
C.4.4 Collegamento TR – TR connection
Eseguire tutti i passi del par.C.3.7 pag.49 e del par.C.3.8 pag.49
Perform all steps of para.C.3.7 pag.49 and para.C.3.8 pag.49

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 51 / 100
100
PROC.C pg.8/8
C.4.5 Riattivazione TR – TR reactivation

4) Chiudere il coperchio dell’ODU (Fig. 15. pag.30)
5) Bloccare il coperchio posizionando le due leve come nel particolare (C) della Fig. 14. pag.29
6) Su IDU, accendere entrambi gli alimentatori su IDU che erano stati spenti nel passo 1 ) pag.46.
On IDU, switch on both power supply units that were switched off in step 1 ) pag.46.
7) Eseguire i controlli funzionali.

C.4.6 Riparazione complesso ’TR + LO + kit adattatori’

’TR + LO + adapter kits’ assembly repair
È ora necessario riparare il complesso rimosso eseguendo, in alternativa:

• il passo C.3.4 pag.48 (sostituzione LO)
• oppure il passo C.3.5 pag.48 (sostituzione TR)
Per verificare la funzionalità del complesso riparato si può:
• rieseguire l’intera procedura inserendo il complesso riparato nell’ODU in esercizio
• oppure, se nel laboratorio di manutenzione fossero disponibili un IDU ed un ODU, provare il
complesso riparato su questo sistema di prova.
To repair the removed assembly, perform, in alternative:

• step C.3.4 pag.48 (LO replacement)
• or step C.3.5 pag.48 (TR replacement)
In order to check the repaired assembly functionality, you can:
• perform again the whole procedure, inserting the repaired assembly into the operating ODU
• or, whenever an IDU and ODU were available in your maintenance center, check the repaired
assembly through this test system.
FINE PROC.C – END PROC.C

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 52 / 100
100
PROC.D pg.1/4
PROC. D : LO 6–7–8 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione LO su TR 6–7–8 GHz con e senza XPIC.

Fig. 23. pag.55.
N.B. Le sigle MCx indicano, a coppie, i due lati del medesimo cavo.
Subprocedure for LO replacement on TR 6–7–8 GHz with/without XPIC option

Fig. 23. pag.55.
N.B. Pairs of writings MCx indicate the two sides of the same cable.
D.1 Smontaggio OL guasto – Faulty OL dismount

1) Disconnettere i connettori (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F1) (F2)
Disconnect connectors (A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F1) (F2)
2) Nel caso di opzione XPIC (vedi Fig. 24. pag.56), disconnettere i connettori (MC1) (MC2)
In case of XPIC option (see Fig. 24. pag.56), disconnect connectors (MC1) (MC2)
3) Svitare e rimuovere le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)

Turn off and remove screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)
4) Rimuovere l’oscillatore, al quale rimangono attaccati due cavi sui connettori (H1) e (H2)
Remove oscillator; two cables remain attached to connectors (H1) and (H2)
D.2 Preparazione OL di scorta – Spare OL preparation
5) Disconnettere i cavi dai connettori (H1) e (H2)

Disconnect cables from connectors (H1) and (H2)
6) Prendere il nuovo oscillatore (stesso codice dell’OL guasto) e montare, nella stessa posizione,
i suddetti cavi sui connettori (H1) e (H2)
Get the new oscillator (same P/N of the faulty OL) and mount, in the same positions, the above
said cables on connectors (H1) and (H2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 53 / 100
100
PROC.D pg.2/4
D.3 Montaggio OL di scorta – Spare OL mounting

7) Montare il nuovo oscillatore sul TR ed avvitare le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)
Mount new oscillator on TR and turn screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)
8) Inserire i connettori (F1) (F2) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

Insert connectors (F1) (F2) (A) (B) (C) (D) (E)

9) Nel caso di opzione XPIC (vedi Fig. 24. pag.56), inserire i connettori (MC1) (MC2)
In case of XPIC option (see Fig. 24. pag.56), inserrt connectors (MC1) (MC2)
D.4 Controllo/taratura frequenza – Frequency check/adjustment
10 ) Connettere il Cavo coassiale N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm (cfr.Fig. 1. pag.8) all’IDU e, dal lato
TR–ODU, al connettore (F) di Fig. 30. pag.71.
Connect coaxial cable N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm (see Fig. 1. pag.8) to IDU and, at TR–ODU
side, to connector (F) of Fig. 30. pag.71.
11 ) Accendere l’alimentatore su IDU.

Switch on power supply on IDU.
12 ) Tramite Craft Terminal, verificare la frequenza del TR e, nel caso fosse diversa dal valore
precedente il guasto, se ne esegua la taratura (questo potrebbe essere necessario nel caso
di Frequency Agility).
Through the Craft Terminal, verify the TR frequency and, in the case it is different from situation
before the fault, adjust it (this could be necessary in case of Frequency Agility).
13 ) Spegnere l’alimentatore su IDU.

Switch off power supply on IDU.
14 ) Disconnettere il Cavo coassiale N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm connesso nel passo 10 )

Disconnect coaxial cable N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm connected in step 10 )
Tornare alla procedura chiamante – Go back to calling procedure
FINE PROC.D – END PROC.D

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 54 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
E
MC2
02
MC4
G4
(8BW 03000 0005 BDZZQ_01)

G1
F2
B
MC3
MC4
PROC.D pg.3/4
H1
MC2
H2
MC3
100
Fig. 23. Sostituzione–Replacement LO – TR 6–8 GHz
G2
F1

D
C
G3
55 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
PROC.D pg.4/4
100
Fig. 24. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 6–15 GHz (XPIC adapter)
(8BW 03095 0001 BDZZQ_01)
56 / 100
PROC.E pg.1/3
PROC. E : LO 11 GHZ
Sottoprocedura per sostituzione LO su TR 11 GHz con e senza XPIC.

Fig. 25. pag.59.
Subprocedure for LO replacement on TR 11 GHz with/without XPIC option.

Fig. 25. pag.59.
E.1 Smontaggio OL guasto – Faulty OL dismount


4) Rimuovere l’oscillatore, al quale rimangono attaccati due cavi sui connettori (H1) e (H2)
Remove oscillator; two cables remain attached to connectors (H1) and (H2)
E.2 Preparazione OL di scorta – Spare OL preparation
5) Disconnettere i cavi dai connettori (H1) e (H2)

Disconnect cables from connectors (H1) and (H2)
6) Prendere il nuovo oscillatore (stesso codice dell’OL guasto) e montare, nella stessa posizione,
i suddetti cavi sui connettori (H1) e (H2)
Get the new oscillator (same P/N of the faulty OL) and mount, in the same positions, the above
said cables on connectors (H1) and (H2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 57 / 100
100
PROC.E pg.2/3
E.3 Montaggio OL di scorta – Spare OL mounting



E.4 Controllo/taratura frequenza



FINE PROC.E – END PROC.E

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 58 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
E
MC4
H2
MC3
G4
(8BW 03067 0006 BDZZQ_01)

G1
F2
A
MC3
MC4
PROC.E pg.3/3
H1
MC2
B
MC2
Fig. 25. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 11 GHz
100
G2
F1

D
C
G3
59 / 100
PROC.F pg.1/3
PROC. F : LO 13–15 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione LO su TR 13–15 GHz con e senza XPIC.
Fig. 26. pag.62.
Subprocedure for LO replacement on TR 13–15 GHz with/without XPIC option

Fig. 26. pag.62.
F.1 Smontaggio OL guasto – Faulty OL dismount


4) Rimuovere l’oscillatore, al quale rimane attaccato un solo cavo sul connettore (H)
Remove oscillator; one cable only remains attached to connector (H)
F.2 Preparazione OL di scorta – Spare OL preparation
5) Disconnettere il cavo dal connettore (H)

Disconnect cable from connector (H)
6) Prendere il nuovo oscillatore (stesso codice dell’OL guasto) e montare il suddetto cavo sul
connettore (H)
Get the new oscillator (same P/N of the faulty OL) and mount, in the same position, the above
said cable on connector (H)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 60 / 100
100
PROC.F pg.2/3
F.3 Montaggio OL di scorta – Spare OL mounting



F.4 Controllo/taratura frequenza – Frequency check/adjustment



FINE PROC.F – END PROC.F

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 61 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
E
MC4
G4
G1
B
A
MC4
MC3
MC2
(8BW 03006 0000 BDZZQ_02)

PROC.F pg.3/3
H
MC2
D
F1
G2
100
Fig. 26. Sostituzione–Replacement LO – TR 13–15 GHz
F2
C
MC7
MC7

G3
MC3
62 / 100
PROC.G pg.1/4
PROC. G : LO 18–23–25 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione LO su TR 18–23–25 GHz con e senza XPIC.

Fig. 27. pag.65.
Subprocedure for LO replacement on TR 18–23–25 GHz with/without XPIC option

Fig. 27. pag.65.
G.1 Smontaggio OL guasto – Faulty OL dismount


G.2 Preparazione OL di scorta – Spare OL preparation

connettore (H)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 63 / 100
100
PROC.G pg.2/4
G.3 Montaggio OL di scorta – Spare OL mounting



G.4 Controllo/taratura frequenza – Frequency check/adjustment



FINE PROC.G – END PROC.G

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 64 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
E
A
MC4
MC2
02
G4
MC7
G1
B
H
MC2
MC3
PROC.G pg.3/4
MC4
100
Fig. 27. Sostituzione–Replacement LO – TR 18–23–25 GHz
G2

F1
D
C
MC7
F2
G3
MC3
(8BW 00560 0005 BDZZQ_03)
65 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
PROC.G pg.4/4
100
Fig. 28. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 18–23–25 GHz (XPIC adapter)
(8BW 03059 0000 BDZZQ_01)
66 / 100
PROC.H pg.1/3
PROC. H : LO 28–38 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione LO su TR 28–38 GHz.

Fig. 29. pag.69.
Subprocedure for LO replacement on TR 28–38 GHz.

Fig. 29. pag.69.
H.1 Smontaggio OL guasto – Faulty OL dismount


H.2 Preparazione OL di scorta – Spare OL preparation

connettore (H)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 67 / 100
100
PROC.H pg.2/3
H.3 Montaggio OL di scorta – Spare OL mounting



H.4 Controllo/taratura frequenza – Frequency check/adjustment
8) Connettere il Cavo coassiale N RG223 – BNC M 50 Ohm (cfr.Fig. 1. pag.8) all’IDU e, dal lato
9) Accendere l’alimentatore su IDU.



FINE PROC.H – END PROC.H

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 68 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
G1
02
E
MC4
A
G4
MC2
MC4
H
MC2
MC7
B
MC3
PROC.H pg.3/3
G2
F1
D
100
F2
Fig. 29. Sostituzione – Replacement LO – TR 28–38 GHz

MC3

C
MC7
G3
(8BW 03069 0001 BDZZQ_01)
69 / 100
PROC.I pg.1/6
PROC. I : TR 6–7–8 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione TR 6–8 GHz
Subprocedure for TR 6–8 GHz replacement
I.1 Generalità – General
La Fig. 30. pag.71 rappresenta il TR senza LO e senza kit adattatore. Ad ogni TR corrisponde uno
specifico codice indicato nel campo (P) della suddetta figura.
Un TR guasto deve essere sostituito esclusivamente con un TR avente lo stesso codice.
I cavi illustrati nelle suddetta figura sono parti integranti del TR (sono presenti anche sulle parti di scorta)
I connettori (A) e (B) sono i punti di attacco dei kit adattatori (che dipendono dal tipo di ODU).
La procedura di sostituzione dipende dal tipo di ODU:
– per ODU 1+0 COMP, eseguire il successivo passo I.2 pag.72
– per ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, eseguire il successivo passo I.3 pag.74
Fig. 30. pag.71 depicts the TR without LO and without adapter kit. Each TR has its own specific P/N
present in label (P) of above said figure.
A faulty TR must be replaced only with a TR having the same P/N.
Cables shown in above mentioned figures strictly belong to the TR (they are present on the spare parts,
too) and must never be removed from the TR assembly.
Connectors (A) and (B) are the joint points for the adapter kits (these latter depend on the ODU type).
The replacing procedure depends on the ODU type:
– for ODU 1+0 COMP, carry out next step I.2 pag.72
– for ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, carry out next step I.3 pag.74
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 70 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
02
(411.200.512 HDZZQ_01 1/3)
F
PROC.I pg.2/6
Fig. 30. TR 6–7–8 GHz

P
100
B
71 / 100
PROC.I pg.3/6
I.2 TR 6–7–8 GHz: ODU 1+0 COMP

Fig. 31. pag.73

I.2.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto
Adapter kits dismounting from faulty TR
1) Disconnettere i connettori (A) (B)

Disconnect connectors (A) (B)

3) Rimuovere i kit adattatori (C) (D)

Remove adapter kits (C) (D)
4) Riporre ordinatamente i kit adattatori e le viti per il successivo rimontaggio

Store tidily adapter kits and screws for successive mounting.
I.2.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

Get spare TR (same P/N of the removed TR)
I.2.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

OL dismounting from faulty TR and its mounting on spare TR
N.B. Passo non necessario se il TR ha già montato il LO, purchè i codici del LO sul TR guasto
e quello del LO sul TR di scorta coincidano.
Step not necessary whenever the spare TR already houses the LO, provided that the LO
P/Ns of removed and spare TR are the same.
5) Eseguire la procedura D pag.53, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
N.B. Nella connessione del LO col TR di scorta, utilizzare i cavi del TR di scorta.
Carry out procedure D pag.53, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
N.B. Use the cables of the spare TR to connect the LO to it.
I.2.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

Adapter kits mounting on spare TR
6) Riposizionare i kit adattatori (C) (D) e fissarli con le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)
Position adapter kits (C) (D) and fix them with screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4)
7) Inserire i connettori (A) (B)

Insert connectors (A) (B)

FINE PROC.I – END PROC.I

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 72 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
C
G2
G1
02
PROC.I pg.4/6
TR 6–7–8 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit
100
Fig. 31. TR 6–7–8 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP

D
G4
G3
(8BW 03000 0000 BDZZQ_02 3/4)

B
73 / 100
PROC.I pg.5/6
I.3 TR 6–7–8 GHz: ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

Fig. 32. pag.75

I.3.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto




I.3.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

I.3.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura D pag.53, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure D pag.53, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
I.3.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta



FINE PROC.I – END PROC.I

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 74 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
C
A
(8BW 03000 0006 BDZZQ_01)

B
G1
G2
PROC.I pg.6/6
TR 6–7–8 GHz: 1+0 EXP./ 1+1/2+0 adapter kit
100
Fig. 32. TR 6–7–8 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

D
G3
G4
75 / 100
PROC.J pg.1/6
PROC. J : TR 11 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione TR 11 GHz
Subprocedure for TR 11 GHz replacement
J.1 Generalità – General
– per ODU 1+0 COMP, eseguire il successivo passo J.2 pag.78
– per ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, eseguire il successivo passo J.3 pag.80
– for ODU 1+0 COMP, carry out next step J.2 pag.78
– for ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, carry out next step J.3 pag.80
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 76 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
F
PROC.J pg.2/6
Fig. 33. TR 11GHz

P
100
B
(411.200.514 HDZZQ_01 1/3)
77 / 100
PROC.J pg.3/6
J.2 TR 11 GHz: ODU 1+0 COMP

Fig. 34. pag.79

J.2.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto




J.2.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

J.2.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura E pag.57, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure E pag.57, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the TR.
J.2.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta



FINE PROC.J – END PROC.J

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 78 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
02
C
G1
G2
PROC.J pg.4/6
TR 11 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit

Fig. 34. TR 11 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP
100
B
G3
G4
(8BW 03067 0001 BDZZQ_01 3/4)
79 / 100
PROC.J pg.5/6
J.3 TR 11 GHz: ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

Fig. 35. pag.81

J.3.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto



4) Riporre ordinatamente le viti per il successivo rimontaggio

J.3.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

J.3.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura E pag.57, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure E pag.57, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the TR.
J.3.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta



FINE PROC.J – END PROC.J

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 80 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
(8BW 03067 0007 BDZZQ_01)

B
G1
PROC.J pg.6/6
G2
TR 11 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit
100
Fig. 35. TR 11 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

D
G3
G4
81 / 100
PROC.K pg.1/6
PROC. K : TR 13–15 GHZ

K.1 Generalità – General
– per ODU 1+0 COMP, eseguire il successivo passo K.2 pag.84
– per ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, eseguire il successivo passo K.3 pag.86
– for ODU 1+0 COMP, carry out next step K.2 pag.84
– for ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, carry out next step K.3 pag.86
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 82 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
F
PROC.K pg.2/6
Fig. 36. TR 13–15 GHz

P
100
B
(411.200.496 HDZZQ_03 1/3)
83 / 100
PROC.K pg.3/6
K.2 TR 13–15 GHz: ODU 1+0 COMP

Fig. 37. pag.85

K.2.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto

2) Svitare e rimuovere le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6) (G7) (G8)
Turn off and remove screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6) (G7) (G8)


K.2.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

K.2.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura F pag.60, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure F pag.60, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the TR.
K.2.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

6) Riposizionare i kit adattatori (C) (D) e fissarli con le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6) (G7) (G8)
Position adapter kits (C) (D) and fix them with screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6) (G7) (G8)


FINE PROC.K – END PROC.K

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 84 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
G2
G3
G4
02
G1
A
C
PROC.K pg.4/6
TR 13–15 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit
100

G6
G8
D
G7
B
G5
(8BW 00562 0000 BDZZQ_02 3/4)
85 / 100
PROC.K pg.5/6
K.3 TR 13–15 GHz: ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

Fig. 38. pag.87

K.3.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto




K.3.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

K.3.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura F pag.60, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure F pag.60, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the TR.
K.3.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta



FINE PROC.K – END PROC.K

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 86 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
C
B
G1
G2
PROC.K pg.6/6
TR 13–15 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit
100
D

G3
G4
(8BW 03007 0000 BDZZQ_01)
87 / 100
PROC.L pg.1/6
PROC. L : TR 18–23–25 GHZ

Sottoprocedura per sostituzione TR 18–23–25 GHz
Subprocedure for TR 18–23–25 GHz replacement
L.1 Generalità – General
Le flange (A) e (B) sono i punti di attacco dei kit adattatori (che dipendono dal tipo di ODU).
– per ODU 1+0 COMP, eseguire il successivo passo L.2 pag.90
– per ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, eseguire il successivo passo L.3 pag.92
– for ODU 1+0 COMP, carry out next step L.2 pag.90
– for ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, carry out next step L.3 pag.92
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 88 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
02
(411.200.484 HDZZQ_04 1/3)
P
PROC.L pg.2/6
Fig. 39. TR 18–23–25 GHz

F
100
B
89 / 100
PROC.L pg.3/6
L.2 TR 18–23–25 GHz: ODU 1+0 COMP

Fig. 40. pag.91

L.2.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto
1) Disconnettere i connettori (A) (B) svitando le viti sulle rispettive flange: (G3) e (G6)
Disconnect connectors (A) (B) turning off screws on relevant flanges: (G3) and (G6)
2) Svitare e rimuovere le viti che fissano i kit adattatori al TR: (G1) (G2) e (G4) (G5)
Turn off and remove the screws fixing adapter kits to the TR: (G1) (G2) and (G4) (G5)


L.2.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

L.2.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura G pag.63, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure G pag.63, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
L.2.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

6) Riposizionare i kit adattatori (C) (D) e fissarli con le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6)
Position adapter kits (C) (D) and fix them with screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6)
FINE PROC.L – END PROC.L

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 90 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
G2
G1
02
C
G3
PROC.L pg.4/6
TR 18–23–25 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit

G4
100
G5
Fig. 40. TR 18–23–25 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 COMP –

D
G6
(8BW 00560 0000 BDZZQ_04 3/4)
91 / 100
PROC.L pg.5/6
L.3 TR 18–23–25 GHz: ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

Fig. 41. pag.93

L.3.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto
2) Svitare e rimuovere le viti che fissano i kit adattatori al TR: (G1–2 viti) e (G3–2 viti)
Turn off and remove the screws fixing adapter kits to the TR: (G1–2 screws) and (G3–2 screws)


L.3.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

L.3.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura G pag.63, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure G pag.63, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
L.3.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

FINE PROC.L – END PROC.L

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 92 / 100
100
PROC.L pg.6/6
G3
G1
D
C
B
A
G2 G4
(8BW 00560 0006 BDZZQ_04)
Fig. 41. TR 18–23–25 GHz: Kit adattatore per 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 –

TR 18–23–25 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 93 / 100
100
PROC.M pg.1/6
PROC. M : TR 28–38 GHZ

M.1 Generalità – General
Le flange (A) e (B) sono i punti di attacco dei kit adattatori (che dipendono dal tipo di ODU).
– per ODU 1+0 COMP, eseguire il successivo passo M.2 pag.96
– per ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, eseguire il successivo passo M.3 pag.98
– for ODU 1+0 COMP, carry out next step M.2 pag.96
– for ODU 1+1 EXP / 1+1 / 2+ 0, carry out next step M.3 pag.98
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 94 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
A
(411.200.504 HDZZQ_01 1/3)

P
PROC.M pg.2/6
Fig. 42. TR 28–38 GHz

F
100
B
95 / 100
PROC.M pg.3/6
M.2 TR 28–38 GHz: ODU 1+0 COMP

Fig. 43. pag.97

M.2.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto
2) Svitare e rimuovere le viti che fissano i kit adattatori al TR: (G1) (G2) e (G4) (G5)
Turn off and remove the screws fixing adapter kits to the TR: (G1) (G2) and (G4) (G5)


M.2.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

M.2.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura H pag.67, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure H pag.67, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
M.2.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

6) Riposizionare i kit adattatori (C) (D) e fissarli con le viti (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6)
Position adapter kits (C) (D) and fix them with screws (G1) (G2) (G3) (G4) (G5) (G6)
FINE PROC.M – END PROC.M

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 96 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
C
02
A
G3
G1
G2
G4
PROC.M pg.4/6
G5
TR 28–38 GHz: 1+0 COMP adapter kit
100

D
G6
(8BW 03053 0004 BDZZQ_01 3/4)
97 / 100
PROC.M pg.5/6
M.3 TR 28–38 GHz: ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

Fig. 44. pag.99

M.3.1 Smontaggio kit adattatori da TR guasto
2) Svitare le viti che fissano i kit adattatori al TR: (G1–2 viti) e (G3–2 viti)
Turn off and remove the screws fixing adapter kits to the TR: (G1–2 screws) and (G3–2 screws)


M.3.2 Prendere il TR di scorta (stesso codice di quello rimosso)

M.3.3 Smontaggio LO da TR guasto e suo montaggio su TR di scorta

5) Eseguire la procedura H pag.67, tenendo conto che non si sta sostituendo il LO ma il TR.
Carry out procedure H pag.67, taking into account that you are not replacing the LO, but the
TR.
M.3.4 Rimontaggio kit adattatori su TR di scorta

FINE PROC.M – END PROC.M

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
3DB 03268 AAAA MSZZQ 98 / 100
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
G1
G2
C
02
(8BW 03090 0001 BDZZQ_01)
PROC.M pg.6/6
TR 28–38 GHz: 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0 adapter kit
100

D
B
G3
G4
99 / 100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
100
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO – END OF DOCUMENT

100 / 100
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 990126 E.Monzani ITAVE E.Maisano ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 1/ 4
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per l’utilizzo di questo documento ed il significato

di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CODICE DI FABBRICA CODICE ANV
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO FROM CS FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
DA CS DA SUFFISSO DA ICS
1 ––01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 2/ 4
4
1 FROM - DA CS=?
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:

DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ HDZZQ ED.02
FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3/ 4
4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
962.000.022 MSZZQ
4
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ

4/ 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
02 000518 A400051701 E.Monzani ITAVE L.Pirovano ITAVE
01 991108 SC99110201 E.Monzani ITAVE E.Maisano ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
487.156.584 MSZZQ 3AL 78909 AAAA MSZZQ 1/ 6
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
2 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01


WRONG DRAWING
DISEGNO ERRATO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
2 FROM - DA CS=01


ATTENZIONE: IL DOCUMENTO HDZZQ Ed 01 all’ Ed 04 è errato.
REAR VIEW - VISTA POSTERIORE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
2.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni

DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release

Refer to correct SW Release of the operator’s handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
487.156.584 MSZZQ
6
3AL 78909 AAAA MSZZQ

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 000703 S400070301 S.SOLIMENA ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RRA–MODEM 128 QAM
ED 01
487.210.480 MSZZQ 3DB 01417 AAAA MSZZQ 1/ 4
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01


ON
ON
TC : PONTICELLI A GOCCIA DI STAGNO ( OVE NON SPECIFICATO, DI SOLO USO INTERNO)

TC : Straps with solder drop ( where not stated, factory use only )

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.01
*= FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
S.A.M.
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01


ON
ON

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
x
x
x
x
x
I2 / I3 :Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al documento di rilascio che descrive il
Software del Craft Terminal.
In order to do these settings, please refer to Craft Terminal Software release.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RRA–MODEM 16 QAM
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01


ON
ON


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SERVICE KIT
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
COMMUTATORI PSK – PSK commutators
COMM. ID DESCRIZIONE – DESCRIPTION

CM1 Prima cifra del numero di telefono per l’EOW
First digit for EOW phone number
CM2 Seconda cifra del numero di telefono per l’EOW, ove lo ”0” deve essere
impostato come ”A”
Second digit for EOW phone number, where ”0” must be set as ”A”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 010516 S401051601 E.CORRADINI ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RRA–MODEM
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 06 ––AA 06
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=06


ON


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 010516 S401051601 E.CORRADINI ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RRA–MODEM
STM1–CR
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01


ON


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
Technical Handbook
Alcatel MDR9000s
MDR9000s Rel.1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02

955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02

MDR9000s1.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 334
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 299.743
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 5 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 5

5 REGISTERS FROM 1 TO 5 ARE NECESSARY
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
1 TARGHETTE - LABELS
2 FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 1/326 12/326
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
4 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’1’ - INSERT REGISTER ’1’
5 HANDBOOK GUIDE 13/326 64/326
7 DESCRIPTIONS 65/326 278/326
9 MAINTENANCE 279/326 292/326
11 APPENDICES 293/326 318/326

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CONTINUA – CONTINUES
ED 02 RELEASED
955.203.322 TQZZA 3EM 07818 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 6
6

CONTINUA – CONTINUES
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
13 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION 319/326 326/326
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 326
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 163
– STAMPARE SOLO FRONTE RECTO PRINTING
ALLEGATI DI UNITÀ (MSZZQ) Vedere lista da pagina: No documenti MSZZQ

14 UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS See list from page: No documents MSZZQ
(MSZZQ) 324 9
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

• The documents MSZZQ cited in section ’HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION’ are
stored in PDAS
• Source files: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1
• PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
Site
Originators MDR9000S REL.1.0

F.FASS
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain :
Division :
Rubric :
Type : MDR9000s 1.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
Name G.MIRELLI
App.
Name
App.
955.203.322 M
3EM 07818 AAAA
Ed.02
MDR9000s1.0
Reg.1+0/1+1/2
WMSN (UHR/UHRC + UHM/UHMC)
OC–3 Urban Link
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
RELEASED
955.203.322 TQZZA
6
3EM 07818 AAAA TQZZA
Y
4/ 6
MDR9000s1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
Reg.1+0/1+1/2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02
VOL.1/1
MDR9000s1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
Reg.1+0/1+1/2
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02
VOL.1/1
MDR9000s1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
Reg.1+0/1+1/2
955.203.322 M Ed.02 3EM 07818 AAAA Ed.02 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
MDR9000s1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
Reg.1+0/1+1/2 – WMSN (UHR/UHRC + UHM/UHMC)
MDR9000s1.0
OC–3 Urban Link
Reg.1+0/1+1/2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
RELEASED
955.203.322 TQZZA
6
3EM 07818 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
6/ 6
NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING
NAVIGATION
THIS HANDBOOK IS COMPOSED BY SEVERAL DOCUMENTS.
PAGE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 1 AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH DOCUMENT.
CROSS REFERENCES (ex. “see Figure 3 on page 45”) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT
WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE
PAGE NUMBERING).
PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN “WARNING ON NAVIGATION”,
TAKE INTO ACCOUNT THAT:
– PDF FILE PAGES 1 TO 426 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING.
– PDF FILE PAGES 427 TO 460 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING
– PDF FILE PAGES 461 TO 470 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE
469/470 IS THIS PAGE).
– IN ORDER TO PRINT A SELECTED PART OF THE HANDBOOK:
• GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
• GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
• THESE TWO NUMBERS ARE THE “RANGE” TO BE SPECIFIED FOR PRINTING.

END OF FILE

MDR Technical

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MDR Technical

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MDR9000S 1.

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

02 011024 S401102401 G.MIRELLI F.FASS

01 010726 G.MIRELLI F.FASS

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 1 / 326

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2 DESCRIPTION OF UHR/UHRC SUBSYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

2.5 ODU - Transceiver physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 2 / 326

2.6 UHR/UHRC General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

2.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

3 DESCRIPTION OF UHM/UHMC SUBSYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

4 STATION LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

4.2.13 MDR 9000s REG. 2+0 FD AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 3 / 326

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

5.4 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 4 / 326

5.4.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

5.5 Power Supply Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

APPENDIX A : MDR-9715S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

APPENDIX B : MDR-9418S / 9518S / 9718S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

B.1 18 GHz Frequency Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 5 / 326

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

LIST OF ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 6 / 326

Fig. 1. Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Fig. 2. Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Fig. 48. ODU 1+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 7 / 326

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 101. Service Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 8 / 326

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 9 / 326

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 10 / 326

Tab. 20. SAM Switch I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 11 / 326

1.1 General information

2) Access to the Equipment

e) Service Personnel skill

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 15 / 326

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

and to the following subsystems:

955.203.322 M 3EM 07818 A AAA 16 / 326

Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.

MDR-9000s Technical Handbook 3EM 07818 AAAA

MDR-9000s Installation Guide 3EM 07819 AAAA

MDR-9000s Line–up Guide 3EM 07820 AAAA

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.

Tab. 3. Special purpose handbooks

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.